JP7362294B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of identification information.

In this type of gaming machine, from the start of variable display of symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, the combination of multiple symbols (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) that constitutes the jackpot display result is It is possible to perform a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed variably while two of the symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed. There were cases in which the type of performance of the development destination was different when the middle symbol passed and when the +5th middle symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line (for example, see Patent Document 1) ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-122194

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the number of the middle symbol and the production type of the development destination, so that the number of the middle symbol passing on the valid symbol combination line is used to determine the development destination. Since it is easy to predict the type of performance, there is a problem in that it is not possible to improve the entertainment level.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of the game.

(1) A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result,
From the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, the decoration identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of decoration identification information is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a production execution means capable of executing a reach production that displays identification information in a variable manner,
The performance execution means is
After executing a predetermined effect after the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a specific effect of variable displaying again can be executed at a first timing and a second timing,
In the case where the first performance is executed when the number of pieces of the one decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the one decoration identification information in the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance becomes the first number; When the number of the decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a second number that is larger than the first number, the first performance is not executed and a second performance different from the first performance is executed. There are cases where two performances are performed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first performance is executed is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second performance is executed,
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed by the effect execution means is greater than the number of types of second effects that can be executed by the effect execution means,
The rate at which the first performance is performed and the rate at which the second performance is performed differ depending on the type of decoration identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach performance,
The first timing and the second timing are timings after starting the reach effect,
Even after the reach effect has started and the specific effect has been executed, the reach effect can be executed;
The ready-to-reach effect is switched as a variable display of the first decoration identification information depending on when the ready-to-reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect and when the ready-to-reach effect is executed after executing the specific effect. The ratio at which the number of pieces of decorative identification information to be displayed is the first number and the ratio at which the number is the second number are different,
It is characterized by
(2) A gaming machine that can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information and control the player to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result,
From the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, the decoration identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of decoration identification information is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a production execution means capable of executing a reach production that displays identification information in a variable manner,
The performance execution means is
After executing a predetermined effect after the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a specific effect of variable displaying again can be executed at a first timing and a second timing,
In the case where the first performance is executed when the number of pieces of the one decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the one decoration identification information in the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance becomes the first number; When the number of the decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a second number that is larger than the first number, the first performance is not executed and a second performance different from the first performance is executed. There are cases where two performances are performed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first performance is executed is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second performance is executed,
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed by the effect execution means is greater than the number of types of second effects that can be executed by the effect execution means,
The rate at which the first performance is performed and the rate at which the second performance is performed differ depending on the type of decoration identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach performance,
The first timing and the second timing are timings after starting the reach effect,
Even after the reach effect has started and the specific effect has been executed, the reach effect can be executed;
It is characterized by
Moreover, the gaming machine of means 1 is
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is generated. ) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
From the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, all identification information except one of the combinations of identification information that constitutes the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a part that allows the performance control CPU 120 to set the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to a ready-to-reach mode) capable of executing a ready-to-reach effect that variably displays one piece of identification information,
The performance execution means performs a first performance (for example, when the number of identification information that is switched and displayed as a variable display of the one identification information in the reach performance becomes a first number (for example, 2)). When performing productions A to C), the number of identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the identification information in the reach production is a second number (for example, 4 pieces) that is larger than the first number. ), the second effect (for example, effects D and E) may be executed.
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first performance is executed is lower than the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second performance is executed,
The number of types of first performances that can be executed by the performance execution means is greater than the number of types of second performances that can be executed by the performance execution means (for example, when performances A to C are executed as the first performances, Compared to the case where performances D to E are executed as the second performance, the rate of control to the jackpot game state is lower, but in the ready-to-reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol - 5" on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is The number of production patterns (3 types of productions A to C) of the first production that can be executed when the "symbol" passes is the "Tenpai symbol - This number is larger than the number of performance patterns (two types of performances D and E) of the second performance that can be executed when the "3 symbol" passes.See Figure 9-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first performance is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is lower than when the second performance is executed, but the number of types of the first performance is equal to the number of types of the second performance. By having a relatively large number of players, it is possible to make the player interested in which type of first performance will be performed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The performance execution means is capable of making it difficult to visually recognize the first identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach performance in the second performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance control pattern PTA- In the variable display performances based on 10 to 12 and 14 to 19, after executing any of the performances D to E, the variable display mode of the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode is set as the high-speed variable display mode of the symbol. (parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times one piece of identification information has been switched and displayed.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect execution means performs a re-variable display in which the variable display of the identification information is performed again a predetermined number of times after the display is temporarily stopped after the variable display of the identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. The specific performance can be performed at a first timing for executing the first performance and a second timing for performing the second performance,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the first timing is lower than the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the second timing (for example, Performance control that executes a pseudo continuous performance when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes over the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode, that is, at the first timing of executing the first performance. When the "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, than the rate of hitting the jackpot with the variable display effects based on patterns PTA-14 to 16. In other words, the percentage of jackpots is higher in the variable display effects based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19, which execute the pseudo continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-reach effect, the rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ (for example, if the ten-pai symbol in the ready-to-reach mode is an even number, Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which effects A to C, which are the first effects, are executed, and the effect D, which is the second effect. - The part where the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which E is executed is different)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the performance execution means executes the first performance and the second performance after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach performance. It is possible to stop displaying a combination of multiple pieces of identification information constituting a specific display result without displaying a specific display result (for example, in production control pattern PTA-1 and production control pattern PTA-7, productions A to E in the reach mode are (The part where the Tenpai symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line after the Tenpai symbol passes over the active line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C without executing the above, resulting in a jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide surprise to the player.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Performance setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of performance settings including a first performance setting and a second performance setting different from the first performance setting (for example, a performance control CPU 120, when the gaming state is in the normal state) (for example, a part that sets the first production mode when the low-accuracy low base state) and sets the second production mode in the time-saving state where the time-saving control is executed,
The performance executing means is capable of executing the ready-to-reach performance regardless of which of the first performance setting and the second performance setting is set by the performance setting means,
If the second effect setting is set, the second effect is executed, while if the second effect setting is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode, , as the performance control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the part where the performance control pattern that can execute the performances A to C that was executable in the first performance mode cannot be selected)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution probability of the first performance can be varied depending on the performance settings, the interest is improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C), (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during variable display. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the production type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a table A for determining the effect (ready-to-reach notice) type, and (B) is a diagram showing a table B for determining the type of effect (setting suggestion). (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display performance determination process as modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when table C for performance type determination is used. (A) is a diagram showing a performance period of a performance during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notices and setting suggestions in the first and second periods for setting values 1 and 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is the diagram when the fluctuation pattern is set to super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution determination rate of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period with the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the first period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and second period for setting value 1 and setting value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach in Example 3, It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6 in super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the first period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a presentation period of a variable display presentation as a fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance determination process according to a fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for setting value 1 and setting value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4. A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period with normal reach and setting value 1 and setting value 6. (C) is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period with setting value 1 and setting value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is super reach and setting value 1 and setting value 6. It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 1st period. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in a 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure showing the production type determination ratio during variable display in the second period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a presentation period of a variable display presentation as a second modification. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for setting value 1 and setting value 6, common to all fluctuation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period for all fluctuation patterns common to normal reach and super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6 in common, (C) is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting value 1 and setting value 6. It is a figure showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in three periods. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern in the characteristic part 052SG. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot reliability of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot A), (B) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit. It is. (A) Variation pattern judgment table for failure (for 1 or less pending memories), (B) Variation pattern judgment table for failure (for 2 to 4 pending memories), (C) Variation pattern judgment table for failure ( (for 5 or more pending memories), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure (for high base medium). 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is a production control pattern determination table (for N reach), (B) is a production control pattern determination table (for S reach α), (C) is a production control pattern determination table (for S reach β), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the performance control pattern determination table (for S reach γ), (E) is the reliability of the performance, and (F) is the reliability of the Tenpai symbol). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing performance control pattern types, and (B) is an explanatory diagram about decorative patterns. It is a diagram showing the flow (1/2) of variable display performance. It is a diagram showing the flow (2/2) of variable display performance. (A) to (L) are diagrams showing operational examples of variable display effects. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing modified examples of the characteristic portion 052SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Additionally, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the display result in the special drawing game is determined to be a "loss". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 103SG of this embodiment)
Next, the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", etc. "Super Reach" is sometimes abbreviated as "S Reach" or "SP Reach." In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when looking at the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board (gauge) that constitutes the game board surface. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. Furthermore, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is hit relatively weakly (hit left) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is a game area where the game ball is launched by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 and flows down. This is a game area in which a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the general winning hole 10 is arranged in the left gaming area 103SG002L, and in the right gaming area 103SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 103SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game balls flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main board 11 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 103SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 103SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball payout rate), etc., which will be described later, in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate it when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by using the button to open the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Furthermore, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, only the clerk in possession of the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, they may be used as one key.

Further, a display monitor 103SG029 that can display set values and a base value to be described later is arranged in the board case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area) has a A first special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first reservation display capable of displaying the number of first reservation memories. device 103SG025A, a second reservation display 103SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 103SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 103SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jacket type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 103SG002R, such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 103SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B each include an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the LED on the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment In the case of section 103SG, the light goes out toward the left.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. For this reason, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 103SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory is When the left two LEDs of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure reservation memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments forming the round display 103SG131 differs depending on these jackpot types.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Note that the production control board 12 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between their respective origin positions and production positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and a second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 103SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (pre-determined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for specifying a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120). Command E101H is a hot start notification command that notifies that pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started without clearing the contents of RAM 102 (recovery from power outage, also referred to as hot start). Command E102H is a cold start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started up (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data read operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is performed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into different types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Instead of first determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided to determine the type of variation. It is also possible to first determine the type of a variation pattern from a random number value for pattern type determination, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from among the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (performance content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach is off, if the set value is 1, it will be the variation pattern in which the normal reach is out, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect will be used. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern in which a non-reach result is performed twice and a non-reach result, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times and a super reach result is used, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-7(B), and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, and the small hit It includes a fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal pattern display result determination table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Although the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment uses separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A), when the setting value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 8-7(B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, if the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, if the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, if the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200. 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If the value is 1, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by 1.5 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by the probability of jackpot in the variable probability state relative to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. The magnification is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). Good too.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in Figure 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see the display result for the first special figure when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special pattern display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the set value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33421. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are determined based on the winning determination value of 1020, regardless of the gaming state and setting value. The judgment value included in the numerical range of consecutive 1 consisting of The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical value range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. That is, the winning of the jackpot and the small jackpot is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (proportion) of a jackpot and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

FIGS. 8-8(A) and 8-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 8-8(A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 8-8(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot types in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 8-9. In the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the transition to a low-probability-high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is performed by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment), or by executing the special figure game for the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-8(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the set value is "1", it is within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "2", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 229 is assigned to jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 209 is assigned to jackpot B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "4", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 189 is assigned to jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 169 is assigned to jackpot B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "6", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to jackpot B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game with the first special symbol, while the ratio for determining jackpot A is the same, in which only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends. Among jackpot B and jackpot C in which both the and probability variable control are executed, the ratio for determining jackpot C becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball payout rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, As the number decreases in the order of 1, the ball output rate decreases.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-8(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of 0 to 299 for MR2 is determined. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "2", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 179 is assigned to jackpot B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "3", of the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 159 is assigned to jackpot B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "4", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 139 is assigned to jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 119 is assigned to jackpot B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of MR2 judgment values 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game with the second special symbol, while the ratio for determining jackpot A is the same, in which only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends. Among jackpot B and jackpot C in which both the and probability variable control are executed, the ratio for determining jackpot C becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball payout rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, In the order of 1, the smaller the number, the lower the ball payout rate.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B. In other words, when the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it is indicated that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B. .

In this way, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, the percentage of determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It has become.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability increases, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player.

Further, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameplay itself does not change, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the gameplay may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of changing the probability is 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is set to a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a certain variable state based on the passing of the jackpot game, while the rate of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different depending on the variable special symbol (so-called V If the setting value set on the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type). Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small winning probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, when changing the gameplay according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the performance switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a gaming switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect). It may also be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10(A) and 8-10(B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (Jackpot A ) and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each of the variation patterns (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in Figure 8-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), if the set value is "1", 1 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 ~400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 380 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "4", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 340 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 300 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775. is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in Figure 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), if the set value is "1", then the judgment value of MR3 is within the range 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-2). It is assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 160 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 100 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 is assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when jackpot A is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). , and decreases in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). The setting value is higher than the ratio and becomes lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

In other words, in this embodiment, if these judgment values indicate that the jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the super reach β is likely to be determined, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot A" In this case, a player who thinks that because the super reach α is assigned in a way that makes it easy to determine, the result will be “jackpot B” or “jackpot C” when the fluctuation pattern of super reach β is executed. can increase expectations.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in Figure 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern judgment table, even if the setting value is 1 to 6, the judgment value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small winning variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the small winning variation pattern in this implementation, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small winning variation pattern, With set values 1 to 6, the small winning variation pattern may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different ratios.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the variation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in Figure 8-11 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure (for low base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the judgment value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 is assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in Figure 8-11(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 is assigned to the non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in Figure 8-11(C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for the total pending storage number of 5 or more during low base), when the set value is "1", the judgment value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β. In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 is assigned to the non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, there is a shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation pattern that corresponds to the time saving control. (PA2-2) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-11(D), in the variation pattern determination table D for failure (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation pattern (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 is assigned to the non-reaching variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3). In addition, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β deviation variation pattern. (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for misses, the ratio of determining non-reach fluctuation patterns and normal reach fluctuation patterns is higher than the ratio of determining super reach fluctuation patterns, and the ratio of determining normal reach fluctuation patterns. The setting values are set to decrease in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach α, and 901 to 997 is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach β. In other words, if the variable display result that is assigned to each variation pattern is a failure, the super reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the setting value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being degraded due to the variable display not being executed.

In the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach α and the determination ratio for the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach β are completely the same between each setting value. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which super reach α deviates and the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which super reach β deviates are determined by the difference between each setting value. may differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

Note that the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is an error, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the error in super reach α and the variation pattern of the error in super reach β, regardless of the set value, are determined. Although a form in which both determination ratios are the same regardless of the setting values set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern that is out of range and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is an error, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the error in super reach α and the variation pattern of the error in super reach β, regardless of the set value, are determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which both determination ratios are the same regardless of the setting values set, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a jackpot, the Regardless of the setting value set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the setting value set.

Note that in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns is exemplified depending on the set value. Depending on the setting values that have been set, there may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. In other words, the determination ratio of fluctuation patterns differs depending on the set value, such as not determining one of the fluctuation patterns (determination ratio is 0%), or determining a particular fluctuation pattern at 100%. It also includes determining the percentage of

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each variation pattern determination table for losing in the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 being any value from 1 to 6, the variation of the super reach is The ranges of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of losing the jackpot differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the percentage of times when the variable display is actually executed in the variable pattern of the super reach being off (super reach is off the The appearance rate of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the characteristic section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in a variable pattern that is off the super reach is different depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and considering the jackpot probability and miss probability for each set value, the variable display shows that the super reach is off at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It may also be executed in a variation pattern.

Furthermore, the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment has a mode in which a variation pattern is determined at a different rate for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to perform a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to perform. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, variable display results, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display on the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. The first display section 103SG029A to the fifth display section 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments formed by seven segments forming a figure "8" and a dot arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E can be lit or blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

Note that the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test target in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

The display monitor 103SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out in all game states, as shown in Figures 8-12(B) and 8-12(C). Base L, which is the real-time value during measurement; Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls of the first out in all game states; Base 2 is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6,000 pitches out for the second time, and the normal state for every 6000 pitches for the third out (low probability low base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as percentages.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, in order to display the abbreviation "bL." for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B. " is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 1 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b1." which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 2 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b2.", which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D. When displaying base 3 on display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 103SG029C and the fourth display section 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of this embodiment, control is executed to sequentially display these bases L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors depending on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". 5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, a clerk at the gaming parlor can identify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by simply checking the display color on the display monitor 103SG029, without the need for the CPU 103 to execute the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (103SGSa001). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process advances to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not the setting value changing flag is set, which indicates that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power was cut off (the power cut occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed). (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clearing process described later has been executed. If set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether the clear switch is ON or not, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with the clear switch being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010); if the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), proceed to 103SGSa011 without executing 103SGSa010. move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), execute setting value change processing (103SGSa013b) to change the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceed to 103SGSa013d, and clear the RAM clear flag. If not set (103SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the setting value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, each time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, based on the lock switch 103SG051 being turned OFF, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value that is newly stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. A command is output to the production control CPU 120.

Further, in the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be ended.

Note that in 103SGSa011, if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether to clear the RAM 102 (or execute the RAM clear process (103SGSa009)) when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time. 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), proceed to 103SGSa014 after executing RAM clear processing (103SGSa013e), and if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), RAM clear processing (103SGSa013e) Proceed to 103SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. This clears the contents of all addresses except for the dress in question.

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is checked when the power supply is stopped (power cutoff). A recovery process is performed to return to the state (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power outage (booted with a hot start), and transmits a command at the time of restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in RAM 102, RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, if the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by an official procedure by an employee of the game parlor, etc. (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated while pachinko is played) When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

Note that if the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), or if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process advances to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start, and transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the production control board 12 (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to a period for notifying a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGSa023), and all segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 start blinking to start notification of a cold start. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 increments the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processes of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029 are executed. stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

Note that the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 blink for a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of a call and start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be made to blink. However, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) to initialize the random number circuit 104, and sets the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029) and interrupts are enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends a message to the production control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error), or that the power has recovered from a power outage during a setting change, which will be described later. An error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 increments the value of the error notification execution wait timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 are executed repeatedly, and if the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a setting value abnormal error occurs. The first display section 103SG029A, the second display section 103SG029B, the third display section 103SG029C, and the fourth display section 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, are used as notifications (error notifications) of recovery from a power outage during the occurrence of an error or a setting change. "E." is displayed in each of (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and also causes the game to start via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the venue, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation by a clerk at the game parlor, etc.). , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B notify the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from an abnormal setting value being set or from a power outage while changing the setting value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the staff of the gaming hall can check the occurrence of an error and the settings from both the front and back sides of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the device has recovered from a power outage during a change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the feature section 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although a mode is illustrated in which the RAM clearing process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag, the present invention is not limited to this; is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when determining that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271;N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the winning command reception command buffer (not shown) are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (103SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern designation command from the variable pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects an even number of 3 symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns that are aligned in the pattern (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol) is used as the stop symbol. decide. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance determination process shown in FIGS. 8-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display performance in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display performance)
The variable display performance includes, as a performance result, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a setting suggestion result that indicates the setting of the setting value performed by the CPU 103 in the setting value change process. This is a performance (predetermined performance) that can be one of the following. In this feature section 103SG, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice performance) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot with the variable display mode becoming a reach, as a performance in which the performance result suggests an advantageous state. be. Further, as a performance whose performance result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, when the performance result can be either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance that can execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion. When it is possible, a ready-to-reach notice whose presentation result is an advantageous state suggestion result can be executed with priority over a setting suggestion whose presentation result is a setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the variable display performance has multiple types of performance patterns (performance modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display performance. When it is decided to execute, it is determined which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 the variable display effect is to be executed based on, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by a lottery whether to execute the variable display performance based on.

As shown in Figures 8-18 (A) to (C), the variable display effect starts when a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of variable display of symbols (timing before the variable display mode becomes reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing paragliders on which passengers are riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The variable display effect ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while multiple images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed that shows a predetermined number of gliders breaking and falling, and depending on the number of fallen paragliders, the set value Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, seven bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, eight bodies break and fall.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-18 (B) and Figure 8-19 (A), the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same for all patterns PT-1 to PT-8, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-8 has the same timing when the paraglider is destroyed. A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number at a time). On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall, similar to pattern PT-8, but the manner in which the paragliders are destroyed is different from pattern PT-9. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. .

The performance period of such a variable display performance is executed based on which of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. In other words, the performance result is a reach notice that will be an advantageous state suggestion result, or the performance result will be a setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is, a common mode of production (for example, a mode of production in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area) A common presentation period in which the presentation is performed, and presentation of a non-common manner in which it is possible to specify whether the presentation result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, when the number of images Z2 according to the presentation pattern is displayed on the image display device) 5) is performed.

In addition, in the background where images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as a variable display effect, decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed smaller than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Further, during the execution period of the variable display performance, another preview performance or the like that is different from the variable display performance may be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-16, among patterns PT-1 to PT-9, for patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7, the setting value is 1. Regarding patterns PT-8 and PT-9, in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, which is a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to a setting suggestion that suggests which of 6 to 6 is to be set, It is said to be a special pattern (special aspect) that corresponds to a reach notice that indicates the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, for the variable display performance, the performance mode during the common performance period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the production mode (number of paragliders destroyed) during the non-common performance period, and there are 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 units are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set value is an even number. (for example, 2, 4, 6), and the pattern PT-5 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even middle setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting). The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} has a low expectation that it will be the same, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the setting value is either 5 or 6. The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} has a high expectation that the setting value is 5 or 6.

Note that in this feature section 103SG, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low settings and setting values 4 to 6 may be high settings. However, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the symbol will be greater than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the symbol will be super reach. suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern {reach notice (low), first For pattern PT-9, it is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach, so it is a second special pattern {reach that is highly expected to become super reach. Advance notice (high), second special aspect}.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 controls the special modes (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggest that the jackpot gaming state is controlled and the specific modes that indicate the setting (for example, the pattern PT-9). It is possible to execute a variable display performance based on any one of multiple types of performance modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice (predetermined performance of special mode) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9. If both the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (predetermined effects of specific modes) are executable, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variable pattern becomes normal reach or super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result becomes a jackpot. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a miss than when it is a jackpot, pattern PT-8 has a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result becomes a jackpot than when it becomes a loss. , it is a pattern with a super reach, that is, a higher jackpot expectation than pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the variable display performance, the number of destroyed paragliders indicates the possibility of a jackpot or which setting value is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more of paragliders without being destroyed may indicate a jackpot or a high setting. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a jackpot and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of characters appearing, the type of characters appearing, etc. It may also be something that can suggest a jackpot or a set value.

In addition, in setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider out of the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. When falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a jackpot or a high setting by outputting a specific sound or emitting light from a game effect lamp 9 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (loss, non-probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. This can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining the type of reach notice is extracted, and table A for determining the type of effect (reach notice) shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach notice in the case where the event is announced (103SGS292).

In table A for determining the performance (reach notice) type shown in FIG. 8-17(A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 60 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach, you will win PT-9 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than Super Reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the probability of winning PT-8 is higher than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

Further, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, you will not win the reach notice.

By setting the determination value in this way, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than in cases other than normal reach fluctuation patterns, and if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than patterns other than super reach variation patterns.

Therefore, if an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to become a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and if an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is more likely to become a super reach variation pattern than a normal reach variation pattern. There is a high possibility that this is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach variation pattern, but it is likely to be a normal reach, so it is considered a reach forecast (low) with low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach variation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that this will happen, it is considered a pattern with a high reach prediction (high) that has a high expectation of a jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not pattern PT-9 {Reach Alert (High)} has been won as a result of the lottery on whether or not the Reach Alert is executed and the type in the 103SGS 292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that pattern PT-9 has won, it is decided to give priority to the execution of the reach notice based on pattern PT-9 over the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out and the current setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are specified (103SGS295). Next, a random number for setting suggestion type determination is extracted, and using table B for determining the effect (setting suggestion) type corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion is to be executed in the effect during variable display; A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, and pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 20 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 15 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 5 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 decision values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 decision values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 decision values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 decision values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 decision values. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, if the setting value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 will be won at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 1 or 3. If the setting value is an even number, 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to win at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 2 or 4, and if the setting value is 5. , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 5, and when the setting value is 6, pattern PT-6 is likely to be won at a higher rate than when the setting value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since pattern PT-7 may win only when the setting value is 6, if a setting suggestion based on pattern PT-7 appears, it is confirmed that the setting value is 6.

Therefore, if effects based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less tend to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paragliders are destroyed. If effects based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of objects displayed is 5 or more are likely to appear, the setting value is likely to be either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be high settings (setting value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are considered to be high settings (setting value 5 or 6). 6) is considered to be a setting with a high possibility (high).

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach notice type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for each random number for determination is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range etc. of each random number for determination may be determined as appropriate. Bye. Moreover, each random number counter for determination for generating each of these random numbers for determination is set in the RAM 122, and each random number counter for determination is updated every timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery on whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type in the 103SGS 296, and as a result, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected. Determine whether or not you have won (103SGS297). If it is determined that one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, if the non-execution of reach notice has been won in 103SGS293, one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is decided. It is decided to give priority to execution of setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-8 over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is not won, that is, if the setting suggestion is not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won. , based on the non-execution of setting suggestion or the winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in 103SGS297, determine whether pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} has been won in 103SGS293. (103SGS300).

If it is determined in 103SGS300 that pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} has been won, if 103SGS297 has won the non-execution of setting suggestion, execution of Reach Notice (Low) based on Pattern PT-8. is determined uniquely, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is determined. Execution is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

103SGS300, if it is determined that pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} has not won, check whether any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has won. It is determined (103SGS302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 has been won, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. In addition, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are won, that is, if the non-execution of both reach notice and setting suggestion is won, the execution of the variable display effect will not be decided and the variable display will continue. The performance determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the production type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the production during variable display is executed. A variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display performance determination process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display performance determination process of 103SGS277, the performance control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether the variable display performance execution determination flag is set, that is, the variable display performance determination of 103SGS277. In the process, it is determined whether it has been decided to execute any of the variable display effects of patterns PT-1 to PT-9.

If the variable display performance execution determination flag is set, proceed to 103SGS279, set the period until the start of the variable display performance in the variable display performance start wait timer (103SGS279), and execute the variable display performance execution. Clear the determination flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the variable display performance execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without passing through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display performance, in this feature section 103SG, the timing when the paraglider appears is the start timing of the variable display performance, and the process table of the variable display performance that is executed from the start of the variable display performance. Since the variable display performance is started based on the variable display performance, we have exemplified a form in which the period until the start timing of the variable display performance is set as the variable display performance start wait timer. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) that indicates a precursor is performed before the start of the variable display effect, and the timing to start the omen is set as the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the start of the variable display performance may be set as the variable display performance start wait timer.

In 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the first embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when executing the variable display of symbols based on the reach variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 performs a predetermined change after starting the variable display and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the production timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or setting suggestion as a variable displaying production, and when deciding whether to execute the variable displaying production, a reach notice whose production result is an advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (special mode presentation) with priority over setting suggestion (specific mode presentation) whose presentation result is a setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the variable display performance determination process in FIG. 8-15, the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery on whether or not to execute a reach notice and its type, and a lottery on whether to execute a setting suggestion and its type. Give priority to

That is, in the lottery for reach notice, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), The notification (high) setting will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the suggestion. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is Normal Reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Since the winning (tentatively determined) is achieved by winning the reach notice (low), even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 will be held at 103SGS297. ) is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot is higher than the reach notice (low), and the performance control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT When both the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is executed. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is possible. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 with priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variable display performance from decreasing due to excessive priority being given to the reach notice and the execution of setting suggestions being restricted.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) which suggests that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the production control CPU 120 -5 to PT-7 when both the setting suggestion (high) and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is set. The setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed with priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, pattern PT-8 is used. It is possible to execute the reach notice (low) based on this pattern with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variable display performance from decreasing due to excessive priority being given to setting suggestions and execution of the reach notice being restricted.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 executes the ready-to-reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Specifically, reach notification (high) is executed with priority over setting suggestion (high), setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over reach notification (low), and reach notification (low) is executed with priority over setting suggestion ( (low). That is, the priority of execution of each production pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low)".

In this feature section 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion. In other words, the variable display effect is an effect that is executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and while the reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot, the setting suggestion is at least This indicates which setting value is not changed during the business period. Furthermore, it is not desirable for a gaming parlor that setting suggestions are frequently made and players can easily guess which setting value is. Therefore, when performing a variable display effect when the super reach variation pattern is used and the setting value is set to high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either one, but the setting value may be suggested at a different timing. However, since jackpot suggestions can only be made during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that reach notices appear at a higher rate than setting suggestions.

In addition, the variable display performance is a performance that is executed only during the variable display period of the symbol based on the super reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the non-reach variation pattern, so the variable display mode is different from the reach variation pattern. If this happens, the player's expectations for the jackpot will be higher than if it is not a reach. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice especially in the case of a variable jackpot reach pattern, the player's expectations for the jackpot will be lowered, and the performance will be inappropriate, resulting in an increase in the reach. By allowing the preview to be executed with priority over the setting suggestion, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate.

In addition, in Example 1, if the tendency of the variable display performance is that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, In some situations such as settings, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice.

In addition, in this first embodiment, the reach preview lottery and the setting suggestion lottery are executed separately, and the reach preview lottery is executed with priority (before) the setting suggestion lottery. Although the example has been given, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery for the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery for the reach notice. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B will be as shown in Figures 8-17 (A) and (B) if the execution rate of the reach notice is set higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion. It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, a mode in which a setting suggestion that suggests setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed is illustrated as the production type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the last time the pachinko game machine 1 was started.

(First invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the first invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when it is possible to execute both the setting suggestion effect, no consideration is given to which effect should be given priority, and the setting suggestion effect is executed to set the setting value when controlled to be in an advantageous state. There was a problem that the direction would be inappropriate. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of variable display of symbols (variable display mode (timing before reaching reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode). In the variable display performance determination process shown in 15, if pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for reach preview, execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over setting suggestion. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 will be drawn at 103SGS301. ) is given priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. ＞Reach notice (low)＞Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of a performance based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 based on the relationship (see Figure 8-20 of Modification Example 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent a predetermined performance of a specific aspect from being executed and the performance from becoming inappropriate.

Specifically, even if a variable display is executed where the variable display result is a jackpot, setting suggestions that can be suggested at times other than the variable display will be executed with priority over the reach notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of winning the jackpot from becoming inappropriate and the performance from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (e.g., reach notification (low)) and a second special aspect (e.g., reach notification (high))
The predetermined performance execution means is
If both the predetermined presentation of the second special mode and the specific presentation are executable, the predetermined presentation of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the specific mode (for example, In the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, if the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the reach preview, the performance control CPU 120 issues a reach preview ( (high) is given priority over the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
If both the predetermined presentation of the first special mode and the specific presentation are executable, the predetermined presentation of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the first special mode. (For example, if the performance control CPU 120 wins any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, in the 103SGS298 (The part where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is given priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming less interesting due to excessively restricting execution of the predetermined effect in a specific mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that makes a suggestion regarding setting a setting value that is more advantageous than the first specific mode. )),
The predetermined performance execution means is
If both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, In the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery, the performance control CPU 120 selects the pattern PT in 103SGS298. -5 to PT-7 (the part where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-7 is given priority over reach notification (low) based on pattern PT-8),
If both the predetermined presentation of the first specific mode and the predetermined presentation of the special mode are executable, the predetermined presentation of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined presentation of the first specific mode. (For example, in the variable display performance determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, if the pattern PT-8 is won in the lottery for the reach preview, the performance control CPU 120 selects the pattern PT-8 in the 103 SGS 301. (The part where the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the pattern is given priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming less interesting due to the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
A motion prompting notification means capable of issuing a motion prompting notice that prompts the player to perform a motion (for example, the performance control CPU 120 provides an operation promotion performance that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B). executable part) and
Operation detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation by the player (for example, operation of operating the push button 31B) regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation promotion notification means is executed. and,
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the detection of a specific motion by the motion detection means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may operate the push button 31B during the operational validity period of the push button 31B). When a specific operation to be performed is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B, regardless of whether or not an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and making it fall. Variation example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute a predetermined performance at a desired timing by performing the specific action, thereby improving the game's interest.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined performance is a common performance period during which a common performance is performed regardless of whether the predetermined performance of the special mode or the predetermined performance of the specific mode is executed (e.g., whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion). Regardless of whether or not there is a common presentation period in which a presentation is performed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area) and the predetermined special mode A non-common performance period in which it is possible to specify whether it is a production or a predetermined production of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the production pattern) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having a common performance period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations regarding whether the predetermined performance of the special mode or the predetermined performance of the specific mode will be executed, so that the game You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine according to the means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special manner that not only indicates that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state but also indicates settings (for example, it is possible to execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) is displayed (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of a paraglider, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears is moving) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of a special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific mode) are executable means, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Various timings may be used as long as the timing is such that the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory If it is to suggest the display result of the above, it is possible to execute the reach notice at any time during the period spanning multiple variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory is executed, and at any timing during the execution period of the variable display. . Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, if both the reach notice (predetermined effect of a special mode) and the setting suggestion (prescribed effect of a specific mode) are executable, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Execute the lottery with priority over the setting suggestion lottery, and execute the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 before the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. and executing the reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than the setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the execution rate of the reach notice is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a jackpot or a set value is suggested depending on the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, a variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and both reach notice and setting suggestion may be executed when possible. The variable display performance may include both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result as the production result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display performance has a common performance period common to the reach notice and setting suggestion, but the reach notice and setting suggestion have different presentation modes (the common performance period is different from that of the reach notice and setting suggestion). It is also possible to use a separate effect (without a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach preview is suggested by a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Even when a ready-to-reach notice and a setting suggestion with different performance modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the ready-to-reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment of the feature section 103SG will be described based on FIGS. 8-20. In FIGS. 8-20, (A) is a flowchart showing the variable display performance determination process as modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by giving priority to the lottery for whether or not to execute the reach notice and the type of the reach notice over the lottery for the execution or not and the type of the setting suggestion. is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery of reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one performance type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20(A), in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (103SGS311). Next, a random number for determining the performance type is extracted, and a table C (not shown) for determining the type of performance (reach notice/setting suggestion) is used to determine whether or not the variable display performance (reach notice/setting suggestion) is to be executed; A lottery is held to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not particularly shown in the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), the determination ratio of effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. In other words, although the determination ratios of production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and setting values 1 to 6, the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in Figure 8-20 (B) is different. As shown in the trend diagram, overall, reach notices are determined at a higher rate (prioritized) than setting suggestions, that is, the decision ratio is set to increase in the order of reach notice, setting suggestions, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined at a rate of 50%, setting suggestion at 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%).

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the ratio of reach notification (high) is higher than reach notification (low) (for example, reach notification (high) is 40%, reach notification (low) is 10%). It is preferable to decide by Also, if the setting value is high setting value 5 or 6, setting suggestion (high) is set at a higher rate than setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5%). %) is preferable. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a rate that satisfies the relationship of reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low). All you have to do is decide to implement it.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be made to differ depending on the variation pattern, setting value, and variable display result. In detail, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern, when it becomes a jackpot, the reach notice should be given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when it is a loss. is preferred.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are executable as the production result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display production. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and setting suggestion result are executable as the production result, the production result of the variable display production is It may be possible to execute a specific performance that provides a specific result that is an advantageous state suggestion result and also a setting suggestion result.

In addition, as a specific effect, for example, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in Figure 8-18, when the image Z1 of a paraglider is displayed, a character (e.g. displaying an image of a paraglider moving), or displaying an image in which the paraglider's display mode (e.g., color, size, speed of movement, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may also be possible to display a different background color, or display an effect image. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may be caused to emit light in a special light emission mode.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when the performance result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, in other words, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display performance, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of these may be independently executable at a different presentation timing from the on-display presentation.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIG. 8-18 (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) at a different performance timing from the variable display performance. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in Figure 8-18 (for example, the ending image of a jackpot) may be given at a timing different from the variable display effect (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be executable.

In Example 1 of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment described above, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display effect may be executed multiple times during the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as Example 2, the first period is from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, targeting the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A variable display performance can be executed during a second period after the first period.

In addition, since the variable display time for non-reach and small winning variation patterns is too short to execute the variable display performance more than once, in this second embodiment, the variable display performance is executed using the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Although it is limited to , non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as targets for execution of the variable display performance.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, in the variable display performance determination process described above, the variable display performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21(B) is used to determine whether or not to execute the variable display performance according to the fluctuation pattern. determined by different ratios. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, the variable display performance execution determination table contains 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining variable display performance execution. are assigned to the execution of the variable display performance, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the variable display performance. In addition, when the variation pattern is super reach, in the variable display performance execution determination table, 60 of the 100 variable display performance execution determination random numbers are allocated to the execution of the variable display performance, and 40 is assigned to non-execution of variable display effects.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21(A).

If the variable pattern is normal reach or super reach and it is decided to execute the variable display effect, it will be executed in the first period as shown in Figure 8-22 (A) and Figure 8-22 (B). The execution of setting suggestion and reach notice is determined at different rates for the variable display performance to be performed and the variable display performance to be executed in the second period. Incidentally, during the same period, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and reach notice is set to be the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 8-23, if it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect pattern) is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation level (low) or expectation level (high)) is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance executed in the second period is set to a pattern at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) is determined, and 60% of the time, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation level (low) or expectation level (High)).

Here, as shown in Figures 8-23 and 8-24, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- is determined at a rate of 1%. 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 35%, pattern PT-9 {reach is determined at a rate of 5% Advance notice (high) is decided. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and at a rate of 2% At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.2% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 55%, it is decided to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}. %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and at a rate of 37%. At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is selected, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 3.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 35% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-25 and 8-26, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, if the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the execution will be executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the variable display production to be performed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Decide on one of PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, decide on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, and decide on pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 25% (High)}. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and at a rate of 2% At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected, at a rate of 5% pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is selected, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.2% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 1.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and at a rate of 37%. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected, at a rate of 5% pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is selected, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, and at a rate of 3.5% it is decided to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 55 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is selected, at a rate of 5% pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is selected, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display performance, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach Notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided to be executed at a higher rate (60%) than pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach This is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of ``Advance Notice (Low)'' or Reach Notice (High)'' is decided.

Therefore, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that indicates an advantageous state becomes more likely to be executed. It is possible to increase expectations for winning the jackpot.

In particular, as shown in Figures 8-23 to 8-26, for the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period, one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided. Regarding the performance type of the variable display performance executed in the second period, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided is determined by the pattern. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

In other words, patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to setting suggestions are determined in the second period. By determining the ratio in the period to be lower than the first period, setting suggestions are executed at a higher rate than reach notifications in the first period, and reach notifications are executed at a higher rate than setting suggestions in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as a variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as a variable display effect in the second period, that is, during the variable display. The variable display may be caused by the reach notice being executed in such a way that the expectation level of the reach notice decreases as the production is repeated (so-called decline), or by the reach notice (high) being executed for the first time. By allowing the player to predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be a super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectations regarding the variable display being a super reach may be lowered. It is now possible to prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed in the second period is better than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which one of patterns PT-5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. In other words, as the variable display effect is executed, it becomes easier to execute the variable display effect in pattern PT-9, so the game for the variable display effect to be executed in patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It is possible to maintain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period. The present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to perform the variable display performance, the variable display performance may be performed three or more times. In addition, when performing the variable display performance three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the performance type so that pattern PT-9 is easily determined each time the variable display performance is executed, It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the technician for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have a pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 Since the ratio at which {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The setting suggestions are difficult to be executed continuously due to the variable display effect. In other words, since the setting suggestion is executed in both of these two variable display performances, it is possible to prevent the variable display performance from becoming monotonous and thereby reducing the game's interest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period use pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined at different rates, so the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Variable display effects make it difficult for reach notices to be executed continuously. In other words, it is possible to suppress the decrease in game interest due to the variable display performance becoming monotonous due to the reach notice being executed in both of these two variable display performances.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate at which the reach notice is executed as these variable display effects differs depending on the case where the performance is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 In the case where the variable display performance is executed and the case where the variable display performance is executed in the second period, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display performance may be the same. By doing this, when the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display performance, but the first period and the second period This can make players expect the same thing.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, if the variable display notice performance is executed during the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the example shows a form in which the execution rate of reach notices is determined to be the same as the variable display performance, the present invention is not limited to this. , the rate at which the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined as the variable display performance may vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. By doing this, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as a variable display performance in the first period and the second period changes depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so the variable display This can prevent the middle performance from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, when focusing on the variable display effects executed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of setting suggestions (patterns PT-1 to PT-1) The percentage that determines the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same percentage regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the percentage that determines the reach notice (the percentage that determines the execution of one of the patterns The ratio for determining the execution of PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, when focusing on the variable display effects executed in the second period, the proportion of decisions to execute setting suggestions (the proportion of decisions to execute any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is higher than that of pachinko gaming machine 1. The same percentage is set at 40% regardless of the set value, and the percentage that determines the reach notice (the percentage that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. The ratio is set to 60%, which is the same regardless of the setting value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 6, the variable display performance executed during the first period (the first variable display performance) will always be The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display performance executed in the second period (the second variable display performance) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60% when the suggestion is executed, it is possible to make the player equally expect the setting suggestion to be executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, by being able to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach previews and setting suggestions in one variable display increase, which improves interest. .

More specifically, if only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of the first variable display, the setting suggestion should be made at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, at the ending of the jackpot game state or when the variable display is Although the variable display can be executed independently during the period when the variable display is not being executed, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention while playing the game. Therefore, in the variable display performance in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is not only possible to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that attracts the most attention of the player, but also allows By making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing setting suggestions, but also to increase the number of times during the second period in the first period as described above. If executed at a higher rate than , it is possible to execute setting suggestions and reach notices in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of reach notices even in fluctuating patterns of jackpots.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution may be determined in which neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed in at least one of the first period and the second period.

If non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution rate of setting suggestions is set to be the same in the first and second periods, the execution rate of reach notices will be different between the first and second periods. can be set. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the second invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when it is possible to execute both the setting suggestion effect, no consideration is given to which effect should be given priority, and the setting suggestion effect is executed to set the setting value when controlled to be in an advantageous state. There was a problem that the direction would be inappropriate. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as a variable display performance) that can execute a predetermined performance using any one of multiple types of performance modes. , or a part that can execute reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means may execute the predetermined performance in a case where both the predetermined performance in the special mode and the predetermined performance in the specific mode can be performed when executing the predetermined performance a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), the predetermined effect is performed during the second time after the first time among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed during the first time among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better when executing the variable displaying effect in the second period after the first period than when executing the variable displaying effect. (Part where notices are executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the predetermined performance in the special mode becomes more likely to be executed, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to the first game result.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 8-22, in the variable display performance executed in the second period, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the variable display performance executed in the first period. It is possible to increase expectations for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state during the second period, which is closer to the timing at which the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a lower rate than the rate at which the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed in the first number of times when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period than in the case where the effect is executed during the variable display in the first period. When executing a variable display effect, the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, is executed at a lower rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of a specific mode is more likely to be executed at a timing close to one game result, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be suppressed from decreasing.

Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine a reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine according to the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The predetermined performance execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). When the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT-. 8 or the part executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect in the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect in the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). When the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is changed from the specific pattern PT-1 to PT-1. parts that execute at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode becomes easier to execute, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode becomes difficult to execute, so that the advantageous state can be controlled at a timing close to the first game result. Expectations can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to display a variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect multiple times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may (The part where variable display effects can be executed in the first and second periods, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect in a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode in which variable display effects can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect has been exemplified, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display performance may be executed even while the reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to display a variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner);
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect multiple times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display (target variation) based on a pending memory that is the target of a pre-read notice). (The part that executes the reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-emptive notice of target change over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set specific mode can be executed before the variable display that becomes one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode that indicates that the control will be in the advantageous state and also provides a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the predetermined effect of the reach notice and the setting suggestion). When both are possible, when displaying a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, image Z1 of a paraglider, the paraglider on which the character appears moves) (e.g., the part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the third invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes,
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested in the first suggestion mode. a second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
The predetermined effect execution means may execute the predetermined effect in the case where both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode are executable when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the example 2). As shown in 8-21, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed the first time among the plurality of times, the predetermined effect after the first time among the plurality When the predetermined effect is executed the second time, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and FIGS. 8-28 to 8 As shown in -31, if the performance control CPU 120 can execute the variable display performance in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as in the second or third embodiment, (The part where setting suggestions (strong) are executed at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect during the second period than when executing the variable display effect during the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode becomes more likely to be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode to be executed is maintained. Can be done.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effects executed during the second period have more setting suggestions (stronger) than the variable display effects executed during the first period. Since it is easier to execute, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high setting value such as 4 to 6.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting settings, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that suggests a setting different from the setting suggested by the mode, is a form that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be one that makes a suggestion regarding a setting that is different in type from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode. The setting value suggested by the mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different setting values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting value 1, and the second suggestion mode suggests setting value 1). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5, and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests A common setting value may be included in both the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4. (e.g., when suggesting setting values 3 to 6 that are intermediate or higher), even if one of the first suggestion mode and second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a set value. good. In other words, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting that is the target of suggestion when there are multiple setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. This includes items with different numbers of values, ranges, etc., or items with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a specific effect including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the corresponding The part where setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executed at the same rate when executing variable display effects in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

In detail, the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period), and the variable display effect is set in the first period. Setting suggestions (strong) are executed at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, to avoid excessive execution of setting suggestions. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the high setting value.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect in the special mode at a higher rate than the rate in which the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number of times (for example, in Example 2 As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period than when executing the variable display effect in the first period. In this case, the part in which reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the rate of execution of the predetermined performance in the special mode increases, so that expectations for an advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to the first game result.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if the execution rate of all setting suggestions is the same in the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to display a variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect multiple times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may (The part where variable display effects can be executed in the first and second periods, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process to display a variable display of special symbols, and as shown in FIG. (a part in which the CPU 120 executes variable display processing to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner);
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect multiple times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display (target variation) based on a pending memory that is the target of a pre-read notice). (The part that executes the reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-emptive notice of target change over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set specific mode can be executed before the variable display that becomes one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to the means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode that indicates that the control will be in the advantageous state and also provides a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the predetermined effect of the reach notice and the setting suggestion). When both are possible, when displaying a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, image Z1 of a paraglider, the paraglider on which the character appears moves) (e.g., the part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the execution of a predetermined performance in a special mode different from the special mode or the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the fourth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as a second embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect). part),
The predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in a first number of times among the plurality of times, and when the predetermined effect is executed in a second time after the first number of times among the plurality of times. It can be executed at different rates (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and after the first period) (The portion where the rate of execution of setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs depending on when the variable display effect is executed in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the likelihood of appearance of the predetermined effect in a specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the production control CPU 120 determines execution of setting suggestions as a variable display production at a higher rate than execution of reach notice in the first period, and By determining the execution of the setting suggestion as a variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, it not only becomes difficult for the setting suggestion to be executed in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is more likely to be executed, the player's expectations for winning the jackpot can be increased. In addition, while in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. .

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 or the part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

In the second embodiment, if it is possible to determine non-execution, it is possible to make the execution rate of the reach notice the same while making the execution rate of the setting suggestion different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (e.g. , as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and during the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. (The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance situation of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the execution of reach notices, while in the second period, the execution of setting suggestions is decided at a lower rate than the execution of reach notices. In the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is more likely to be executed, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be increased.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, the effect control CPU 120 is When executing the variable display effect during the period, there is a part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the CPU 120 for effect control. When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values than when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the setting value, and the setting when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as a second embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect). part),
When it is set to the first setting value among the plurality of setting values and when it is set to the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values, The predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in Pachinko machine 1, and the variable display effect executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in Pachinko machine 1. (The part where suggestions are carried out at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first setting value or the second setting value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode in the predetermined number of times does not change, so that the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode is You can expect the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, regardless of which value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the process is executed in the first period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect (appearance situation) and the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect executed in the second period (appearance situation) are the same, that is, the setting value is Since the appearance of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether a low setting value or a high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value based on the appearance situation of setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio of setting suggestions (appearance situation) and the ratio of setting suggestions being executed as a variable display effect executed in the second period (appearance situation) remain the same, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2, etc.) among the plurality of setting values 1 to 6 (occurrence status) If the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as a variable display effect executed in the second period (occurrence status) is the same, setting values other than the above two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) will be the same. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence status) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value of 1 to 6 only in the variable display performance that is executed in the first period or the variable display performance that is executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which setting suggestions are executed as variable display effects executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effects executed in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence status) may not change.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when it executes the variable display effect in the second period). (The section that executes reach notifications based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different rates (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and (The part where the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting values are set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. Regarding the display performance, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and for the variable display performance to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. (The part where the reach notification is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate depending on when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, In the part where the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the setting value, and in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, (The part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display and display of the variable display result. For example, the first period may be from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period may be from the start to the end of super reach, or the first period may be from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period may be from the start of normal reach. or until the end of the super reach, or when the variable pattern is temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo continuous variation pattern with a pseudo continuous effect that looks like a variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display, etc. , it may be made to correspond to a re-variable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display performance can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the variable display performance is performed the same number of times, the reach is possible regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is given in which the execution of the advance notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27(A) and 8-27(B) as a third embodiment, two variable display effects are performed during one variable display. In the case where it is possible to execute the same number of times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the same number of variable display effects are performed. You may.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the variable display effect, as shown in Figure 8-27 (A) and Figure 8-27 (B), the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the second period The execution of setting suggestions and reach notices is determined at the same rate in the variable display performance executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 30%, pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and at a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 30%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%, and 2. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 35%, and Pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%, and 2. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 40%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT is determined. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 2%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 45%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and at a rate of 3%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 45%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%, and 4. At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 50%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT is determined. Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 55%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Advance notice (high)} is decided.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-30 and 8-31, if we pay attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, if the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 1, then in the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 is determined at a rate of 1%. ～Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided on, pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided on at a rate of 17.5%, Pattern PT is selected at a rate of 17.5% Decided to be -9 {Reach Forecast (High)}. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 30%, pattern PT-8 is determined. Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 58.8%. Decide on one of PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} and decide on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 20% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2.2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and 35 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 1.5% of the time it is determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)}, and 22.5% of the time At a rate of 22.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and at a rate of 22.5%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , at a rate of 2.5%, one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 40 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 2%, decide on one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 25%, select pattern PT-8. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, at a rate of 45% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided on, 3.5% decided on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting suggestion (high)}, and 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and at a rate of 27.5%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , at a rate of 4.5%, one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 50 %, pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)}, decide on one of Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} at a rate of 5%, and select Pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided, at a rate of 5% it is decided to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is selected.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display performance, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from 1 to 6, the first period is The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the variable display production executed during the variable display and the variable display executed in the second period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the presentation type of the medium presentation is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the production type of the variable display performance executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 (reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)) are determined as the performance type of the variable display performance that is executed is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can have the same expectations for the advantageous state suggestion result.

On the other hand, when executing the variable display effect in the first period or the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and when the second setting value The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting value suggestion (high)} is determined as the production type differs depending on the setting value (for example, setting value 6). Since the appearance of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on whether it is set to the first setting value or the second setting value, it is possible to suppress the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, for the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period, each time the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, a pattern is set as the performance type. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined has decreased, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice ( high)} is determined. For this reason, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 5, 6), the setting value is suggested more than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4). Since it becomes difficult to execute, it becomes difficult for a player who recognizes the variable display performance to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the variable display performance executed in the second period is better than the variable display performance executed in the first period with pattern PT-9 as the performance type. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on pattern PT-9 becomes more likely to be executed, thereby maintaining the player's expectation that the variable display effect will be executed in pattern PT-9. can be done.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting value suggestion (high)} are determined between the production and the variable display production executed in the second period is the same; Although a form is illustrated in which the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined is the same, the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period will have a pattern PT-1. ~ The rate at which PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined may be different, or pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (High)} may be determined at different rates.

In addition, in this third embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period, these variable display performances are the same. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which setting suggestions are executed based on the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Setting suggestions may be performed at different rates as these variable display effects depending on when the variable display effect is executed. By doing this, the rate at which setting suggestions are executed (occurrence rate) changes between when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed during the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes the variable display performance (the first variable display performance) in the first period and the variable display performance that the performance control CPU 120 executes in the second period. When executing a reach notice as a medium performance (second variable display display), an example is shown in which the reach notice is executed at different rates depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes variable display effects that the effect control CPU 120 executes in the first period (the first variable display effect) and variable display effects that the effect control CPU 120 executes in the second period. When performing a reach notice as the second variable display performance, if the same number of variable display performances is performed, the reach notice will be given at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1. May be executed. By doing this, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) will not change depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 if the same number of variable display performances are performed. In this way, it is possible to keep the player's expectation that the ready-to-reach notice will be executed in the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a variable display effect can be executed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach effect),
The predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in a first number of times among the plurality of times, and when the predetermined effect is executed in a second time after the first number of times among the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and when the effect is executed during the variable display period) (The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period and when it executes the variable display performance in the second period, these variable display Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same rate (65% in the example shown in Figure 8-27) as the medium effect, the settings are set for the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. The player can similarly be made to expect that the suggestion will be carried out.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Embodiment 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the medium effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectation can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, , a pattern in which the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. (Part where reach notification based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the third embodiment, if it is possible to determine non-execution, it is possible to make the execution rate of the setting suggestion the same in the first period and the second period, and to make the execution rate of the reach notice different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which setting value is set from 1 to 6, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values than when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at different rates depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing a variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate depending on the set value, and the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second period When executing a variable display effect in , the part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the seventh invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a predetermined performance according to any one of a plurality of types of performance modes) as a variable display performance in any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. (a part that can execute setting suggestions based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined performance can be performed multiple times (for example, a part where a variable display performance can be performed in a first period and a second period before starting the reach performance),
When the setting value is set to the first setting value among the plurality of setting values and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as a third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period) When executing, the part where setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different rates depending on the set setting values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the predetermined number of times changes depending on whether the first setting value or the second setting value is set, so it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, depending on which value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 from 1 to 6, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display during the first period. Since the execution rate (occurrence status) of setting suggestions changes depending on when executing the medium effect and when executing the variable display effect during the second period, the player can check not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value based on the appearance of setting suggestions in .

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and When executing variable display effects during the period, reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the special effect when executing the predetermined effect a first time among the plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time after the first time among the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different rates (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when it executes the variable display effect in the second period, (Part where reach forecast can be executed based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

Specifically, since the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice is the same no matter which setting value is set from 1 to 6, the setting value can be made difficult to predict based on the appearance situation of the ready-to-reach notice.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, the effect control CPU 120 is When executing a variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate depending on the set value, and the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the second period (The part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value when executing the variable display effect in .)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the first period Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. determines whether to perform a reach notice or setting suggestion based on the setting value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while determining whether to perform the reach notice or setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value for the second period. It may be determined which one to perform, that is, which one to perform in the first period or the second period, based on different criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach reach effect, and A variable display performance can be performed in a second period after the first period. In addition, since the variable display time is short for non-reach and small hit variation patterns to execute the variable display effect more than once, in this embodiment 4, the execution target of the variable display effect is the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. It is limited to.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display performance determination process described above, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display performance is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, processing is executed to determine the type of variable display performance based on the fluctuation pattern. Below, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 8-33.

As shown in FIG. 8-33, in the variable display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified using the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. Next, it is determined whether the identified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. If so, the variable display performance determination process is terminated because the variable display performance is not applicable.

When the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out and the current setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are specified (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting values specified in the 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the variable display performance in the first period and the performance type (performance pattern) when executing the variable display performance execution determination table (not shown) is determined. (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in the 103SGS314, the performance control CPU 120 uses the common variable display performance execution determination table when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, to notify the reach, to suggest settings, and to indicate non-execution. Decide on one of the following. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determination of setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, the execution of reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, the reach notice will be determined based on the common execution ratio. It is set such that the larger the value, the higher the execution rate of setting suggestions and the execution rate of setting suggestions (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-35, if we pay attention to the variable display performance type determination ratio in the first period, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 18%, and 40. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 15%, and 43. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 12.5%, Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 45.5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 10%, and 46. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50% At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 40%. So pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether execution of the variable display effect in the first period has been decided (103SGS315), and if execution has been decided, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT -9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and sets a variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display performance in the first period has been decided (103SGS317); Proceed to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process advances to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined that it is normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or not, based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the setting value. Whether or not to execute the variable display performance during the period and the performance type (performance pattern) to be executed are determined using a variable display performance execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34(B), in 103SGS319, the performance control CPU 120 uses the variable display performance execution determination table for normal reach to determine one of ready-to-reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determination of setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of a setting value of 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, reach notices and setting suggestions are determined by a common execution ratio, and setting suggestions ( (High) is set so that the larger the set value, the higher the execution rate.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, if we focus on the case of normal reach regarding the variable display notice performance type determination ratio during the second period, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is decided to be non-executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 2%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.2%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.5%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 32%. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 30. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, At a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (high)} is determined.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executable at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 29%. Pattern PT-1 to Pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 6%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-8 {Reach Forecast (Low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not normal reach, that is, it is super reach, then based on the specified fluctuation pattern and setting value, whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the second period, and the execution The performance type (performance pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display performance execution determination table (for super reach, not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the performance control CPU 120 uses the variable display performance execution determination table for super reach to decide between reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of set value 1 and set value 6, the performance control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and determines non-execution. do not decide. Note that the execution ratios corresponding to setting values 2 to 5 are omitted here, but regardless of the setting values 1 to 6, reach notices and setting suggestions are determined by a common execution ratio, and setting suggestions ( (High) is set so that the larger the set value, the higher the execution rate.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, if we pay attention to the case of Super Reach regarding the variable display notice performance type determination ratio in the second period, the setting value set in Pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and at a rate of 4%. Pattern PT5 to Pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is determined at a rate of 5%, Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and Pattern PT-9 { Reach Forecast (High)} is decided.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 5%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 5%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is decided at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Pattern PT-9 {Reach Notice (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the performance type (performance pattern) of the variable display performance to be executed in the first period will be changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting Suggestion (Low)} is decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {Setting Suggestion (High)} is decided at a rate of 8%, and Pattern PT-8 {Reach Notice (Low)} is decided at a rate of 5%. }, and pattern PT-9 {Reach Forecast (High)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether execution of the variable display effect in the second period has been decided (103SGS321), and if execution has been decided, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 ~PT-9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and sets a variable display performance execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display performance in the second period has been decided (103SGS323). ), ends the variable display performance. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the variable display performance ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when executing the variable display effect in the first period of multiple times, the setting value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. 6, and when executing the variable display effect in the second period, the variable pattern is normal reach and super reach. Determine the reach preview or setting suggestion based on a separate decision table. In other words, since the criteria for determining whether to perform a reach notice or a setting suggestion are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the execution rate of setting suggestions in the first period is higher than the execution rate of setting suggestions in the second period, so while setting suggestions are more likely to be executed in the first period, in the second period Since it is easier to execute, the setting suggestion will not be executed more easily in both the first period and the second period even if it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not likely to be executed in the second period, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, the execution rate of reach notices in the second period is higher than the execution rate of reach notices in the first period, so the display can be changed by executing reach notices in both the first and second periods. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the middle production. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, when paying attention to each setting value, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, When determining the execution of the reach notice at the same rate (40%) and executing the variable display effect in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided based on the same ratio (60%). For this reason, the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, are different from the execution of the reach notice. In the same way, it can attract the attention of players.

In addition, even if the setting value is set high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, reach notice is more likely to be executed than setting suggestion in the second period, and even if super reach is In this case, the reach forecast (high) is likely to be executed, so it is possible to suppress the player's expectations for the jackpot from decreasing.

Furthermore, even if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed compared to the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion is made in super reach. Even if this is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the high setting.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of reach notice and setting suggestion are determined at the same rate, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting value is 1, 2, As the settings increase in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, so the higher the setting, the more likely setting suggestions will appear, so it is easier for players to set the setting value. It becomes easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-34, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance in the first period (the first variable display performance) and in the second period. Although a form is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different rates depending on when the variable display performance (second variable display performance) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. , the performance control CPU 120 may decide to execute the reach notice at the same rate in the case where the variable display performance is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display performance is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player have the same expectations for the execution of the ready-to-reach notice in the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance.

In addition, in this embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 8-34, if the variable display performance is the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, in the variable display performance of the same number of times, the reach notice may be executed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. may be determined in different proportions. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same type of performance from being decided for the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance, so that the variable display performance is not monotonous. You can prevent it from happening.

(Eighth invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the eighth invention described below. In other words, in conventional gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result can be changed to a jackpot by changing the setting value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that allowed you to change the probability of being controlled (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. , there was a problem that there was a possibility that the presentation would be inappropriate because no consideration was given to how to execute the setting suggestion presentation for the first and second times of the multiple times. . Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent inappropriate performances.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, whether the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or "small win" in the variable pattern setting process of S111) (a part that determines the fluctuation pattern to be one of multiple types using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the predetermined result of whether or not to do so);
A variable display means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that can execute variable display according to the determined variable display pattern, in the effect processing during variable display, displays decorative patterns based on the display result and variable pattern specified by the effect control command) (the part that executes variable display),
A predetermined performance determining means that determines the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be one of a plurality of types (for example, in the variable display performance determination process, one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is selected as the performance pattern of the variable display performance. ), and
A predetermined effect execution means that can execute the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect based on any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7) (a part where setting suggestions or reach notification based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed),
Equipped with
The production mode of the predetermined production includes a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or PT-9) and a suggestion regarding settings. A specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined performance execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, there is a part where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the reach effect) ),
Based on at least the setting value that has been set, the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be executed at the first time among the plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as Example 4, the performance control (a part in which the CPU 120 determines the performance type of the variable display performance in the first period based on the set value),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the performance mode of the predetermined performance to be executed in a second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 8-33, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance type of the variable display performance based on the set value and fluctuation pattern set in the variable display performance in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the presentation mode of the predetermined presentation are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined presentation from becoming monotonous.

In detail, as shown in Figure 8-33, when determining the performance type of the variable display performance in the first period (the first variable display performance), the variable display performance type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. While determining the performance type of the performance (see 103SGS314), when determining the performance type of the variable display performance in the second period (second variable display performance), the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the pachinko gaming machine The performance type of the variable display performance is determined based on the setting value set to 1 (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the criteria for determining the type of performance are different between the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance, the first variable display performance and the second variable display performance differ. This prevents the execution of the same type of performance from being decided, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 may issue a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. parts executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first time or the second time, the same expectations can be given to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode at different rates when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (e.g. As shown in FIG. 8-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the pattern PT in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. -8 or the part where the reach notification based on pattern PT-9 is executed at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance situation of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means is configured to perform a predetermined effect when a first setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a first setting value different from the first setting value. 2 set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as Example 4, the effect control CPU 120 is When executing the variable display effect during the period, there is a part in which the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and a part in which the effect control CPU 120 is When executing a variable display effect during two periods, the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode in the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the setting value, it is possible to have the same expectations regarding the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
When executing the predetermined effect a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means sets a second set value that is different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate depending on when the setting value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, The part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value, and the part that is set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. (The part that executes reach notification based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present Example 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether to perform setting suggestion or reach notice according to the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to perform setting suggestion or reach notice based only on the setting value. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion depending on whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate depending on whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, it is determined whether to perform the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Not limited to this, in the second period, either reach notification or setting suggestion is executed not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit. It may also be possible to decide whether

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature section 103SG of the embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the start of the variable display can be executed for the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variable display performance can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the normal reach reach performance, and the second period after the first period, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display performance may be executed three or more times during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated as a variable display multiple times. It may also be executed at a timing corresponding to the re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the fluctuating pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like this.

For example, as shown in Figure 8-38 as modification example 2, all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach, and super reach are targeted, and from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the normal reach reach effect. There is a first period before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and a second period that is after the first period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern. The performance during variable display can be executed in a third period which is after the second period and corresponds to a re-variable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the present modification example 2, the first period is executed before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is executed before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern. The second period is executed in response to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the third period is executed at the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed at the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may also be executed in response to the re-variable display.

In this modification example 2, in the variable display performance determination process described above, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, any of the setting values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. The performance type of the variable display performance is determined depending on whether the variable display performance is set, and for the second and third periods, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the variable display performance is based on the setting value Executes processing to determine the type of performance.

Specifically, in the first period, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (does not determine the execution of the reach notice). Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases. In the third period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. Note that the settings are made such that as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) increases.

In addition, while the proportion of setting suggestions determined in the second and third periods is set to be lower than the proportion of setting suggestions determined in the first period, reach notices are determined in the first period. By setting the ratio that determines the reach notice in the second and third periods to be higher than the ratio, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in this modified example 2, when executing the variable display effect in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and When executing the variable display effect during the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variable pattern. That is, since the criteria used by the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous performance is such that the expectation of a jackpot increases as the number of re-variable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable display is In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice, and the third re-variation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern will be a super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing this, setting suggestions can be made while suppressing the possibility that reach notices occur frequently and the reliability of reach notices decreases in the case of a fluctuating pattern that involves one or two pseudo-continuous performances. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern involving three pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to prevent setting suggestions from occurring frequently and lowering the player's expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in this modification 2, in the first period where the jackpot reliability is the lowest, execution of setting suggestions is determined with priority over reach notice according to the setting value, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, so setting suggestions are preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods when the jackpot reliability is higher than in the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. Since it is determined with priority, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations for the jackpot.

In addition, in this modification example 2, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, the execution of the setting suggestion need not be determined 100% of the time. Further, in the second period, although the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the ready-to-reach notice, the execution of the ready-to-reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. In addition, in the third period, we exemplified a form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, It is not necessary to determine execution at a 100% rate.

In addition, in this modification 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined according to the setting value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined with priority over the reach notice. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which execution of the reach notice is determined with priority over setting suggestions depending on whether the reach is normal reach or super reach, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice according to the setting value, and in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is determined according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. may be determined with priority over setting suggestions.

In addition, in the second modification example, the execution of the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach notice in the first period according to the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are multiple In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern. A reach notice may also be determined.

Furthermore, in the second modification example, in the second period and the third period, execution of the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If so, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in Examples 2 to 4, as a variable display effect executed in the first period, the rate at which setting suggestions are determined to be executed is set higher than the rate at which reach notices are determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution is determined with priority, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. The performance may be determined by giving priority to the execution of setting suggestions depending on the order of processing for determining the type of performance.

In addition, in Examples 2 to 4, as a variable display effect executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is higher than the rate at which setting suggestions are determined, so that the reach notice is determined. Although a mode in which execution is prioritized is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-15 as a first embodiment, during variable display executed in the second period As for the performance, the execution of the ready-to-reach notice may be given priority depending on the order of processing for determining the performance type.

Although Examples 1 to 4 of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these Examples 1 to 4, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. are also included in the present invention.

For example, in Examples 1 to 4, a mode in which a variable display effect can be executed multiple times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed multiple times. It may be possible to execute the process over a plurality of variable displays (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information regarding the variable display whose execution was suspended when the starting winning occurred (for example, display results (including jackpot type), random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.). By pre-reading and determining the display results and fluctuation patterns based on the extracted random numbers, and transmitting the determination result to the performance control board 12 as a performance control command at the time of starting winning, the performance control CPU 120 can If it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview effect that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that was the target of the look-ahead notice will be A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a pre-read notice of a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display performance at a predetermined timing. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a process is executed in which a number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process are destroyed and changed to an image Z2 indicating falling, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the push sensor 35B detects an operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A) by the player, the image changes to image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation. You may also do so.

In addition, when changing to image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the valid operation period of the push button 31B. As an operation promotion effect, an operation promotion image (for example, a text image saying "Continuously hit!" or a button image) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the user is operating the push button 31B, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and causing it to fall) can be executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the variable display performance may be ended without any reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing this, a player who knows the specific action can execute an effect that changes the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

In addition, as an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, an operation promotion image that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect may be executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 where the variable display effect is executed. Even if an operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting section built into or around the push button 31B, which is provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 where the player's attention is focused, good. By doing this, only the players who know the specific action or the players who have noticed the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, which improves the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as a predetermined performance in which the performance result suggests an advantageous state, a reach notice indicating the possibility of becoming a reach is applied as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the predetermined effects that result in an advantageous state suggestion include a stop symbol preview that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol will stop, a character preview where a character appears, and a step in which the preview image changes step by step. Various preview performances can be applied as long as they are suggestive performances that suggest the possibility of a jackpot, such as a close-up preview or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the variable display performance has a common performance period common to the reach notice and setting suggestion, but the reach notice and setting suggestion have different presentation modes (corresponding to the common performance period). (Specifically, the reach preview may be a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion may be a suggestion using a paraglider, etc.). Even when a ready-to-reach notice and a setting suggestion with different performance modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the ready-to-reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, a first effect image corresponding to a reach notice and a second effect image different from the first effect image and corresponding to a setting suggestion are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 during the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by changing the display mode such as emitted light color, brightness, contrast, etc. By making the visibility higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 is capable of drawing images in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, it may draw the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and set When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer are drawn in the image display device 5. When the first effect image is displayed overlappingly with the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when drawing the second effect image on the upper first drawing layer and drawing the first effect image on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set to be lower than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (by making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by making the sound aspects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice will be the same as the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method to increase the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, in addition to increasing the volume of the sound effect, you can also increase the audibility by decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM. Good too. Note that this also includes cases in which a sound effect corresponding to a reach notice is output, but a sound effect corresponding to a setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, if the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of playback channels (for example, playback channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the playback channels. For example, the first performance sound corresponding to the reach notice can be played on the first playback channel, and the second performance sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be played on the second playback channel different from the first playback channel. At the same time, when playing the first effect sound and the second effect sound at the same timing from different playback channels (first playback channel and second playback channel), the first effect sound played on the first playback channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound played on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by making the light emission color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emission mode corresponding to the reach notice and the visibility of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion can be changed. In other words, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be more visible than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that there are also cases where the light is turned on in response to a reach notice, but the light is not turned on but turned off in response to a setting suggestion.

In other words, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that, as explained in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2, the production result will be either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result. In addition to increasing the execution rate of reach notices in cases where the performance result is both an advantageous situation suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, the presentation mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is better than the production mode of setting suggestion. This includes things that are prioritized. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over setting suggestions means that the execution rate, display, and sound are adjusted so that the reach notice has a higher performance effect on the player than the setting suggestion has on the player. It also includes performing the performance with different presentation modes such as , light, and movement of movable objects.

Further, in the above embodiment, the setting suggestion suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 is set as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be one that suggests the possibility that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has not been changed (left unchanged).

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout of prize balls is faster than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) where conditions are more likely to be met, a high probability game state (high probability state) where the probability of becoming a jackpot game state is high, a high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), a special reach state (e.g. , super reach, etc.), and a state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

(Characteristic part SG052)
Next, a gaming machine according to Example 5 as the characteristic part 052SG of this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 9-1 to 9-10. In the characteristic section 052SG of this embodiment, the configurations that are different from those of Examples 1 to 4 in the characteristic section 103SG will be mainly explained, and the description of the similar configurations will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 052SG. The variation patterns of the characteristic part 052SG include non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1 to 4), normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1), normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1), and super reach α. The fluctuation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the super reach β (PA2-3) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). , a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ loss (PA2-4), a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4), and a fluctuation pattern of small hit (PC1-1) are prepared in advance.

Among these, the variation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ are such that after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and before the display result is derived and displayed, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed. This is a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed that makes one variable display appear to be a multiple variable display, and the variation pattern of Super Reach β is a pseudo continuous effect that is executed once. This is a variation pattern that makes it appear as if the variable display has been performed twice, and the variation pattern of Super Reach γ is as if the pseudo continuous effect has been executed twice and the variable display has been performed three times. It is said to be a fluctuation pattern that shows.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052SG, although the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance is executed is set only to the variation pattern of super reach, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous performance is The fluctuation pattern to be executed may also be set as the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and by doing so, when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it can be expected to develop into a super reach. become.

In addition, although the pseudo continuous effect is executed once in the variation pattern of super reach β, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice in the variation pattern of super reach γ, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect can be changed arbitrarily, and a variation pattern may be prepared in advance in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three or more times and the variable display is executed four or more times.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the feature section 052SG, the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Expectation level: Super reach γ > Super reach β > Super reach α > Normal reach), in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, and the more times the pseudo continuous performance is executed, the higher the expectation of jackpot. It has become.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), super reach γ jackpot For each of the variation patterns (PB1-4), a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3(A) and 9-3(B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (Jackpot A ) and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each variation pattern (PB1-3) and super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), a predetermined random number value from the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take is used as the judgment value. Assigned.

As shown in Figure 9-3 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), the judgment value range 1 of MR3 is common when the setting value is any of 1 to 6. Of ~997, 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 600 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 601 850 to 850 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4).

As shown in Figure 9-3 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the judgment value of MR3 is common when the setting value is any of 1 to 6. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 100 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 250 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). 251 to 550 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4).

In this way, when jackpot A is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) or super reach γ It is set to be higher than the ratio that determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4). In addition, when jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio that determines the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) or the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) is It is set to be higher than the ratio that determines the α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2).

In other words, in this embodiment, these judgment values are such that when the type of jackpot is "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot C", Super Reach γ or Super Reach β is easily determined; A, the super reach α is assigned in such a way that it is easy to determine, so when the variation pattern of the super reach β or super reach γ is executed, it will be a “jackpot B” or “jackpot C”. It is possible to heighten the player's expectation that the game will become a reality.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in Figure 9-3 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is common regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. Among the numbers 1 to 997, numbers 1 to 997 are assigned to the small winning variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit in this implementation, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more fluctuation patterns are provided as the fluctuation pattern of the small win. Variation patterns for small wins with values 1 to 6 may be determined at different ratios from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base gaming state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D, which is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4). It is being

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 1 or less), the same is common when the setting value is 1 to 6. Of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). ), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), and 951 997 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-4).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super The random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected for the fluctuation pattern of reach α out of reach (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of reach (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of reach (PA2-4). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 2 to 4), it is common when the setting value is 1 to 6. Of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-2). 1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), 951 to 997 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super The random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is selected for the fluctuation pattern of reach α out of reach (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of reach (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of reach (PA2-4). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 5 or more), the same is common when the setting value is any of 1 to 6. Of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). ), 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), 851 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3), and 951 997 is assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, the variation pattern for shortening non-reach failure (PA1-4), the variation pattern for normal reach failure (PA2-1), and the fluctuation pattern for super reach α failure, which correspond to the time saving control. (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β being off (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ being off (PA2-4). A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in Figure 9-4 (D), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table D for failure (high base medium), the judgment value of MR3 is common when the set value is 1 to 6. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 950 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 951 to 997 are super reach γ It is assigned to the outlier variation pattern (PA2-4).

In this way, when using the losing variation pattern determination tables A to D, the proportion of non-reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns is set to be higher than the proportion of super reach variation patterns. In addition, when using the variation pattern judgment tables A to D for failure, regardless of the variation pattern judgment table, the judgment values from 701 to 850 are the variation patterns for the deviation of super reach α, and from 851 to 950 are the deviation patterns for the deviation of super reach β. Fluctuation patterns 951 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ. In other words, if the variable display result is a failure, the fluctuation patterns of super reach are common regardless of the set value. Since the decision ratio is determined, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being degraded due to the variable display based on the variation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 9-1). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the feature section 052SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to 9-4(C), a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for failure that differs depending on the total number of pending memories. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be varied (for example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the number of pending memories of the first special symbol The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number (or, if variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the number of reserved storage numbers of the second special symbol).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each miss in the characteristic section 052SG, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any number from 1 to 6, the variation pattern for the miss of the super reach (PA2-2 and PA2-3) have the same range of random numbers. However, since the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of losing the jackpot differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the percentage of times when the variable display is actually executed in the variable pattern of the super reach being off (super reach is off the The appearance rate of the variable pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, the feature section 052SG exemplifies a form in which the fluctuation pattern is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at a different rate for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the above-mentioned feature section 103SG, an example is shown in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to perform a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to execute. In this case, when a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern other than a non-reach variation pattern is determined, the production control CPU 120 performs a program that is prepared in advance based on the special symbol variation time and variable display results of the determined variation pattern. Which of the plurality of reach effects to be executed is determined by drawing lots.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (052SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (052SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) is "1-0" to "1-4". ” are shifted upward by one buffer number (052SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Furthermore, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 052SGS271 (052SGS271;N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (052SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (052SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (052SGS273; Y), the start The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the winning command reception command buffer (not shown) are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (052SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 052SGS272 or 052SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (052SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (052SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the feature part 052SG, when the received variable display result designation command is a second variable display result designation command corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as an even number symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols may include a plurality of combinations of odd symbols including "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "777", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table (not shown) in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated. (omitted) may be used to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-6(F). The mode is a reach mode (when the two decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the variable display continues for the decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed yet). If the two decorative symbols forming part of the stopped and displayed jackpot combination (hereinafter also referred to as ten-pai symbols or reach symbols) are odd-numbered symbols, the odds will be higher than if they are even-numbered symbols. The jackpot reliability (jackpot expectation level) is also high, and when the tenpai symbol is a "7" symbol, the jackpot reliability (jackpot expectation index) is higher than when the tenpai symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7" or an even number symbol. ) is determined to be high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052SG, although the form in which the jackpot reliability (jackpot expectation level) is higher when the Tenpai symbol is an odd number symbol than when it is an even symbol is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the stopping symbols may be determined so that the jackpot reliability (jackpot expectation) is approximately the same when the ten-pai symbol is an odd numbered symbol excluding the "7" symbol and when it is an even numbered symbol.

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern designation command read from the variation pattern designation command storage area in 052SGS275 (052SGS277). If the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (052SGS277; Y), a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is selected (052SGS278), and the process proceeds to 052SGS286. If the variation pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (052SGS277; N), it is determined whether the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (052SGS279). If the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (052SGS279; Y), based on the variable display result and stop symbol that have been determined, extraction is performed using the performance control pattern determination table A shown in Figure 9-6 (A). The effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the numerical value of the random number for effect control pattern determination is selected (052SGS280), and the process proceeds to 052SGS286.

If the variation pattern is not a normal reach variation pattern (052SGS279; N), it is determined whether the variation pattern is a super reach α variation pattern (052SGS281). If the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern (052SGS281; Y), based on the determined variable display results and stop symbols, use the performance control pattern determination table B shown in Figure 9-6 (B). , selects the performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the extracted random number for determining the performance control pattern (052SGS282), and proceeds to 052SGS286.

If the variation pattern is not a super reach α variation pattern (052SGS281; N), it is determined whether the variation pattern is a super reach β variation pattern (052SGS283). If the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern (052SGS283; Y), based on the determined variable display results and stop symbols, use the performance control pattern determination table C shown in Figure 9-6 (C). , selects the performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the extracted random number for determining the performance control pattern (052SGS284), and proceeds to 052SGS286.

If the fluctuation pattern is not the super reach β fluctuation pattern (052SGS283;N), the fluctuation pattern is super reach γ, so the effect shown in Figure 9-6 (D) is performed based on the determined variable display result and stop symbol. Using the control pattern determination table D, select the production control pattern (process table) corresponding to the extracted random number for production control pattern determination (052SGS285), and proceed to 052SGS286.

After executing the processes of 052SGS278, 052SGS280, 052SGS282, 052SGS284, and 052SGS285, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (052SGS286).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (052SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image (for example, a variable display image of a decorative pattern, a background image, etc.) according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (052SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (052SGS289). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (052SGS290).

Note that the characteristic section 052SG does not execute the processes (103SGS278 to 103SGS280) related to the variable display effect determination process performed in the characteristic section 103SG in the variable display start setting process (S171) explained in FIG. 9-5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the feature section 052SG also executes processing related to the variable display effect determination process performed in the feature section 103SG, that is, the variable display effect. It may be possible.

(Variable display effect)
Next, the variable display performance performed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(A), the production control CPU 120 corresponds to a non-reach variation pattern (any of PA1-1 to PA1-4) that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command read out by the 052SGS275. While selecting a performance control pattern to perform a reach performance, if it is a variation pattern other than a non-reach variation pattern, that is, a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern that executes a reach production, multiple types of production control patterns prepared in advance PTA-1~ Select one of the 21 performance control patterns.

Specifically, in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, one of the performance control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-7 is selected using the performance control pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 9-6(A), and the super If it is a reach α fluctuation pattern, select any one of the performance control patterns PTA-8 to PTA-12 using the performance control pattern determination table B shown in FIG. If so, select any one of the performance control patterns PTA-13 to PTA-19 using the performance control pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 9-6(C), and if it is a super reach γ variation pattern, Using the performance control pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 9-6(D), one of the performance control patterns PTA-20 to PTA-21 is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(D), as a performance control pattern determination table for determining a performance control pattern for executing a variable display performance of decorative symbols, the variable pattern Table A (for normal reach) for determining a performance control pattern used when is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, and Table B (for super reach α) for determining a performance control pattern used when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach α fluctuation pattern. ), the effect control pattern determination table C (for super reach β) used when the variation pattern is the super reach β variation pattern, and the effect used when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern A control pattern determination table D (for super reach γ) is prepared in advance, and these production control pattern determination tables A to D contain random values for production control pattern determination for each variation pattern. A predetermined random value within a possible range is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the performance control pattern determination table A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, five judgment values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-1, and the performance control 8 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-3, 15 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-4, and the production control pattern PTA -5 is assigned 25 determination values, performance control pattern PTA-6 is assigned 35 determination values, and performance control pattern PTA-7 is assigned 2 determination values. In addition, if the variable display result is a failure, 35 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-1, 25 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-2, and the production control pattern PTA- 15 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-4, 8 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-6. Five determination values are assigned, and two determination values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-7.

In this way, in the performance control pattern determination table A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6 are determined in order. When the ratio becomes higher and the variable display result is off, the determined ratio becomes lower in the order of production control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each production control pattern is higher in the order of production control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, and PTA-6 (Jackpot reliability: PTA -1<PTA-2<PTA-3<PTA-4<PTA-5<PTA-6). In addition, the production control pattern PTA-7 has the lowest determination ratio among the patterns PTA-1 to PTA-7 regardless of the variable display result, so it is considered to be a production control pattern with an extremely low frequency of appearance.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(B), in the performance control pattern determination table B, if the variable display result is a jackpot, ten judgment values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-8, and the performance control 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-9, 20 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-10, 25 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-11, and the production control pattern PTA -12 is assigned 30 judgment values. In addition, if the variable display result is a failure, 30 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-8, 25 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-9, and the production control pattern PTA- 10 are assigned 20 determination values, performance control pattern PTA-11 is assigned 15 determination values, and production control pattern PTA-12 is assigned 10 determination values.

In this way, in the effect control pattern determination table B, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the decision ratio increases in the order of effect control patterns PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12. , When the variable display result is off, the decision ratio becomes lower in the order of production control patterns PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each performance control pattern is higher in the order of PTA-8, PTA-9, PTA-10, PTA-11, and PTA-12 (Jackpot reliability: PTA-8<PTA-9< PTA-10<PTA-11<PTA-12).

As shown in FIG. 9-6(C), in the performance control pattern determination table C, when the variable display result is a jackpot, five judgment values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-13, and the performance control Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PTA-14, ten judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-15, fifteen judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-16, and the production control pattern PTA 15 determination values are assigned to -17, 20 determination values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-18, and 30 determination values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-19. In addition, if the variable display result is a failure, 30 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-13, 20 judgment values are assigned to the production control pattern PTA-14, and the production control pattern PTA-14 is assigned 20 judgment values. 15 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-15, 15 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-16, 10 judgment values are assigned to production control pattern PTA-17, and production control pattern PTA-18 is assigned 15 judgment values. Five determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-19.

In this way, in the production control pattern determination table C, if the variable display result is a jackpot, production control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, and PTA-18 are determined in order. When the ratio becomes higher and the variable display result is off, the determined ratio becomes lower in the order of production control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, and PTA-18. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each production control pattern is higher in the order of production control patterns PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, PTA-18, and PTA-19 (jackpot Reliability: PTA-13<PTA-14<PTA-15<PTA-16<PTA-17<PTA-18<PTA-19).

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), in the performance control pattern determination table D, if the variable display result is a jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-20, and the performance control Seventy judgment values are assigned to pattern PTA-21. Further, when the variable display result is a failure, 70 determination values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-20, and 30 determination values are assigned to the performance control pattern PTA-21.

In this way, in the production control pattern determination table D, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the decision ratio increases in the order of production control patterns PTA-20 and PTA-21, and if the variable display result is a loss, the production control pattern The decision ratio decreases in order of PTA-20 and PTA-21. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of each performance control pattern is higher in the order of performance control patterns PTA-20 and PTA-21 (jackpot reliability: PTA-20<PTA-21).

In addition, each of the performance control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-21 includes a pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a loss, and a pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a loss, and the determined stop symbol "1". ” to “11”, and when any of the production control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-21 is selected, a process corresponding to the variable display result and the stop symbol in the selected pattern. Although the table is selected, these details are omitted for convenience of explanation.

(Contents of variable display effects)
Next, the contents of the variable display effects executed based on these effect control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-21 will be explained based on FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9.

When executing the variable display of decorative symbols based on any of the production control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-21, the performance control CPU 120 controls the process from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the display result is derived and displayed. At a predetermined timing, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to the reach mode. As mentioned above, the reach mode refers to the decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when they constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later. This is a mode in which variable display continues.

Specifically, the ready-to-reach mode means that after the variable display of decorative symbols starts in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, any two of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, The same decorative symbols stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R form part of a jackpot combination (for example, "777"), and the decorative symbol display areas At 5C, a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols continues (for example, "7↓7") is maintained.

In addition, in the feature part 052SG, since it becomes a jackpot combination when three identical decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line, two of the three decorative symbols ( Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (2 or more) If the combination is a jackpot combination when all the symbols are stopped and displayed, even if n-1 decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed on the predetermined active line, it becomes a reach mode. good. In addition, the Tenpai pattern is displayed not only in the "left/right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R as described above, but also in the "left/middle" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and the "middle/right" decorative pattern display areas. It may be stopped and displayed in any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, such as areas 5C and 5R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(B), in the feature section 052SG, when the special pattern game start condition is satisfied, variable display of decorative symbols is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. In detail, the 11 decorative patterns numbered "1" to "11" are changed at high speed from above to below a predetermined effective line in ascending order of "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 →..." (moving) high-speed variable display (also referred to as high-speed fluctuation) is started (see FIG. 9-10(A)). Note that the high-speed variable display is, for example, a variable display in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are varied (switched) to different decorative symbols in a manner that is difficult or impossible to recognize.

Further, after being variably displayed from "1" to "11", it returns to "1", and the variable display in ascending order is repeatedly executed. Note that the decorative symbols may be variably displayed in a descending order of "11→10→9→8→..." or may be variably displayed at random.

In addition, in the characteristic section 052SG, at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L is changed to a low-speed variable display ( (also referred to as low-speed fluctuation), the predetermined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see Figure 9-10 (B)), and then the variable display in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R becomes a low-speed variable display and the predetermined decorative pattern is displayed. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. Note that the low-speed variable display is, for example, a variable display in which the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are varied (switched) to different decorative patterns in an easily visible or visible manner.

In the case of a non-reach variation pattern (or a small hit variation pattern), decorative symbols with different numbers are stopped and displayed in the "left and right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the "middle" decorative symbol is displayed. The area 5C becomes a low-speed variable display and a predetermined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the case of a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the same decorative symbol is displayed in a static manner in the "left and right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and only the "middle" ornamental symbol display area 5C is variably displayed. (See Figure 9-10 (C)). In the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display of the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is switched from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display, and symbols are switched and displayed in ascending order starting from the nth symbol before the ten-pai symbol. For example, "n" = 6, that is, the "tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" means if the tenpai symbol is "7", it indicates the "1" symbol 6 symbols before it, and if the tenpai symbol is "3" If so, the symbol "8" six symbols before it is shown (see Figure 9-7 (B)).

In addition, in the characteristic section 052SG, each time the decorative pattern moves from the top to the bottom in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and passes a predetermined valid line, the decorative pattern is switched to a different decorative pattern and displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the variable display of a decorative pattern means that a decorative pattern on a predetermined effective line is switched to a different decorative pattern. It is fine as long as it is something. In addition, the switching display of decorative patterns does not only mean switching when the decorative pattern passes over a predetermined effective line as described above, but also means that the transmittance of the decorative pattern displayed on a predetermined effective line is changed. It may be possible to switch to a different decorative pattern as the height increases, or to switch to a different decorative pattern as the form of the decorative pattern gradually changes. Moreover, the display may not only be switched to a different decorative pattern instantaneously, but may be switched to a different decorative pattern by changing in stages.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052SG, a form in which a decorative pattern, which is decorative identification information consisting of numbers, is applied as an example of identification information that can be identified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the The information may be a combination of individually identifiable alphabets, symbols, or multiple dots, characters, or pictures.

Next, the contents of the variable display performance executed based on each performance control pattern will be explained based on FIG. 9-7(A). In addition, in Figure 9-7 (A), for convenience, details of the flow of variable display performance from the start of variable display until the variable display mode becomes reach mode are omitted, and the details are mainly shown in the reach mode. It describes the flow of the variable display performance that follows.

When executing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-1 among the effect control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-7 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display effect in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After starting the variable display of decorative symbols and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. ", "Design of Tenpai symbol -4", "Design of Tenpai symbol -3", "Design of Tenpai symbol -2", "Design of Tenpai symbol -1", "Design same as Tenpai symbol" are passed in this order. . After passing the "same symbol as the Tenpai symbol" over the active line, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-8, for example, a decorative pattern of "7" is stopped and displayed in the "left/right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R to set the reach mode, and then "1→ Decorative patterns are variably displayed in the order of 2→3→4→5→6→. After the "7" decorative symbol passes, a predetermined symbol (for example, a "7" decorative symbol if the variable display result is a jackpot, a decorative symbol other than "7" if the variable display result is a loss) Stop and display.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-2, after starting variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, ” After passing the “Tenpai symbol-6 symbol” and “Tenpai symbol-5 symbol” on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the “Tenpai symbol-4 symbol” is passed. The variable display of decorative symbols is interrupted at the previous timing, and performance A (see FIG. 9-10(E)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-3, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, ” After passing the “Tenpai symbol-6 symbol” and “Tenpai symbol-5 symbol” on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the “Tenpai symbol-4 symbol” is passed. The variable display of decorative patterns is interrupted at the previous timing, and effect B (see FIG. 9-10(F)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display effect based on the effect control pattern PTA-4, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, ” After passing the “Tenpai symbol-6 symbol” and “Tenpai symbol-5 symbol” on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the “Tenpai symbol-4 symbol” is passed. The variable display of decorative patterns is interrupted at the previous timing, and effect C (see FIG. 9-10(G)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-5, after starting variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, ” Pass the “Tenpai symbol-6 symbol”, “Tenpai symbol-5 symbol”, “Tenpai symbol-4 symbol”, and “Tenpai symbol-3 symbol” on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After this, the variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted at a timing before the "tenpai symbol-2 symbol" is passed, and performance D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-6, after starting variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, Pass through the effective line in the decorative pattern display area 5C of ``Tenpai pattern-6'', ``Tenpai pattern-5'', ``Tenpai pattern-4'', and ``Tenpai pattern-3''. After this, the variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted at a timing before the "tenpai symbol-2 symbol" is passed, and a performance E (see FIG. 9-10 (I)) to be described later is executed. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-7, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, ” on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. At the timing after passing the "Design-2 symbol" and "Design of Tenpai symbol-1" and before passing the "same symbol as Tenpai symbol", high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed as production F. Start. Thereafter, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when executing the variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-8 among the performance control patterns PTA-8 to PTA-12 corresponding to the super reach α variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 controls the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C. , After starting the variable display of decorative symbols in 5R and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol," the variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted, and the effect A (Fig. 9-10 ( (see E)). Thereafter, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-9, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "medium" After the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" have passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol" has passed. At the timing of , the variable display of decorative patterns is interrupted, and effect B (see FIG. 9-10(F)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-10, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "medium" After the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" have passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol" has passed. At the timing of , the variable display of decorative patterns is interrupted, and effect C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-11, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, "Medium" The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted at a timing before the "tenpai symbol-2 symbol" is passed, and a performance D (see FIG. 9-10 (H)) to be described later is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-12, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Later, at a timing before the "tenpai symbol-2 symbol" is passed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is interrupted, and a performance D (see FIG. 9-10 (I)) to be described later is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when executing the variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-13 among the performance control patterns PTA-13 to PTA-19 corresponding to the super reach β variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 controls the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C. , After starting the variable display of decorative symbols in 5R and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and then the pseudo continuous symbol is tentatively used as the decorative symbol. Stop display. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, "Tenpai pattern -6 pattern", "Tenpai pattern -5 pattern", "Tenpai pattern -4 pattern", "Tenpai pattern -3 pattern", "Tenpai pattern -2 pattern", "Tenpai pattern - Pass it in the order of 1 symbol. Then, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-14, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" have passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol" has passed. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at the timing of , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern", and before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern", the decorative pattern is displayed variablely. The process is interrupted, and performance B (see FIG. 9-10(F)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-15, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" have passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol" has passed. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at the timing of , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern", and before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern", the decorative pattern is displayed variablely. The process is interrupted, and performance C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-16, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "medium" After the "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" have passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C, but before the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol" has passed. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at the timing of , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, after passing through "Tenpai pattern-6", "Tenpai pattern -5", "Tenpai pattern -4", and "Tenpai pattern -3", and "Tenpai pattern -2". The variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted at a timing before passing the "symbols", and effect D (see FIG. 9-10(H)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at a high speed in a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-17, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "medium" The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at a timing before passing the "tenpai pattern-2 pattern", the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern", and before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern", the decorative pattern is displayed variablely. The process is interrupted, and performance B (see FIG. 9-10(F)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-18, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, "Medium" The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at a timing before passing the "tenpai pattern-2 pattern", the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern", but before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern", the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. The process is interrupted, and performance C (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed at high speed, the variable display mode is set to a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-19, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and after setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, "Medium" The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at a timing before passing the "tenpai pattern-2 pattern", the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, after passing through "Tenpai pattern-6", "Tenpai pattern -5", "Tenpai pattern -4", and "Tenpai pattern -3", and "Tenpai pattern -2". The variable display of the decorative symbols is interrupted at a timing before passing the "symbols", and effect D (see FIG. 9-10(H)), which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is variably displayed at a high speed in a super reach mode, and after a super reach effect (not shown) is executed, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when executing the variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-20 among the performance control patterns PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the super reach γ variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 controls the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C. , After starting the variable display of decorative symbols in 5R and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" and "Tenpai symbol" are displayed on the effective line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. After passing the "-5 symbol" and before passing the "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", the high-speed variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and then the pseudo continuous symbol is tentatively used as the decorative symbol. Stop display. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, A high-speed variable display of the decorative design is performed after passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern" and before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern". After starting, a pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the third variable display and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol", without executing effects A to E, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, and the super After performing a reach effect (not shown), a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

When performing a variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-21, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, The "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", and "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" were passed on the effective line in the decorative symbol display area 5C. After starting the high-speed variable display of the decorative pattern at a timing before passing the "tenpai pattern-2 pattern", the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as the decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the second variable display and setting the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, A high-speed variable display of the decorative design is performed after passing the "Tenpai pattern-6 pattern" and "Tenpai pattern-5 pattern" and before passing the "Tenpai pattern-4 pattern". After starting, a pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9, after restarting the variable display, that is, starting the third variable display and changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, After passing the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol", without executing effects A to E, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the variable display mode is set to the super reach mode, and the super After performing a reach effect (not shown), a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the characteristic part 052SG, when the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, and then displays the "Tenpai" on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. When the "symbol -5 symbol" passes, any of the performances A to C as the first performance can be executed, while the "Tenpai symbol - When the symbol 3 passes, any of performances D to E as the second performance can be executed.

In other words, after changing the variable display mode to the normal reach mode, if the number of symbols passing on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C becomes 2, that is, from the time when the normal reach mode is set, When the number of decorative symbols switched and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C becomes two, any of the performances A to C as the first performance can be executed, while the "medium" decorative symbol When the number of symbols that have passed on the effective line in the display area 5C is 4, that is, when the number of decorative symbols switched and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is 4, the second effect It is possible to perform any of the performances D to E as follows.

As shown in Figures 9-10 (E) to (I), performances A to C are suggestive performances that suggest the possibility of a jackpot when character C1 appears, and performance D is a suggestion performance in which character C2 appears. This is a suggestive performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot if the character C3 appears. These characters C1 to C3 are displayed using the entire display area so as to overlap in front of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Although it is difficult to visually recognize, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, a plurality of fourth symbols are variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area E1 provided at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The fourth symbol is a smaller symbol than the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the fourth symbol is a smaller symbol than the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. While variable display is performed in synchronization with special symbols), high-speed variable display of symbols is always performed regardless of changes such as the variable display mode of decorative symbols becoming a reach mode. It should be noted that the decorative symbols and FIG. 4 may be the same or different in the display mode of the symbols, the combination of stop symbols, etc., as long as the decorative symbols and FIG. 4 are always variably displayed in synchronization.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052SG, the effects A to C as the first effects and effects D and E as the second effects are exemplified as effects in which the characters C1 to C3 appear, but the present invention is not limited to this. This is not limited to, and the presentation mode of the first presentation and the second presentation can be changed in various ways as long as the presentation is different from the variable display presentation of decorative patterns, and it may be possible to change the presentation mode of the first presentation or the second presentation in various ways, such as presentations where characters do not appear, such as speech presentations or story presentations. Alternatively, it may be a variable display effect (ready-to-reach effect) in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern simply changes.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to (D), the performance A is executed in the performance control pattern PTA-2 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern and the performance control pattern PTA-8 corresponding to the super reach α. Performance B is executed in the performance control pattern PTA-3 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the performance control pattern PTA-9 corresponding to the super reach α, and the performance control patterns PTA-14 and 17 corresponding to the super reach β. The performance C is executed in the performance control pattern PTA-4 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the performance control pattern PTA-10 corresponding to the super reach α, and the performance control patterns PTA-15 and PTA-18 corresponding to the super reach β.

In addition, the performance D is executed in the performance control pattern PTA-5 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the performance control pattern PTA-11 corresponding to the super reach α, and the performance control patterns PTA-16 and 19 corresponding to the super reach β. . The performance E is executed in the performance control pattern PTA-6 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern, the performance control pattern PTA-12 corresponding to the super reach α, and the performance control patterns PTA-20 and 21 corresponding to the super reach γ.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6(E), the jackpot reliability of the production control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-7 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern is the production control patterns PTA-1, PTA-2, PTA-3, PTA-4, PTA-5, PTA-6, PTA-7 are higher in this order (Jackpot reliability: PTA-1<PTA-2<PTA-3<PTA-4<PTA-5<PTA-6< PTA-7), the jackpot reliability of production control patterns PTA-8 to PTA-12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern is as follows: (Jackpot reliability: PTA-8<PTA-9<PTA-10<PTA-11<PTA-12), and the jackpot reliability of production control patterns PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to the super reach β fluctuation pattern The degree of performance control pattern increases in the order of PTA-13, PTA-14, PTA-15, PTA-16, PTA-17, PTA-18, and PTA-19 (Jackpot reliability: PTA-13<PTA- 14<PTA-15<PTA-16<PTA-17<PTA-18<PTA-19), the jackpot reliability of production control patterns PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the super reach γ variation pattern is the production control pattern PTA- 20 and PTA-21 (Jackpot reliability: PTA-20<PTA-21).

Production control patterns PTA-1 to 7 corresponding to normal reach variation patterns, production control patterns PTA-8 to 12 corresponding to super reach α variation patterns, production control patterns PTA-13 to 19 corresponding to super reach β variation patterns, super The production control patterns PTA-20 to 21 corresponding to the reach γ variation pattern are higher in the order of production control patterns PTA-1 to 7, PTA-8 to 12, PTA-13 to 19, and PTA-20 to 21.

Therefore, the jackpot reliability in performance control patterns PTA-1 to PTA-7 corresponding to the normal reach variation pattern is that performances D to E are executed more than performance control patterns PTA-2, 3, and 4, in which performances A to C are executed. The performance control patterns PTA-5 and 6 are higher, and the jackpot reliability in the performance control patterns PTA-8 to PTA-12 corresponding to the super reach α fluctuation pattern is higher than the performance control patterns PTA-8, in which performances A to C are executed, Performance control patterns PTA-11 and 12 in which performances D to E are executed are higher than performance control patterns PTA-11 and 12, in which performances D to E are executed, than 9 and 10, and the jackpot reliability in performance control patterns PTA-13 to PTA-19 corresponding to the super reach β variation pattern is higher than performance B. The performance control pattern PTA-16 in which the performance D is executed is higher than the performance control pattern PTA-14 and PTA-15 in which the performances B to C are executed, and the performance control pattern PTA-17 in which the performances B to C are executed, Performance control pattern PTA-19 in which performance D is executed is higher than performance control pattern PTA-18, and the jackpot reliability in performance control patterns PTA-20 to PTA-21 corresponding to the super reach γ variation pattern is higher than performance control pattern PTA-20. Performance control pattern PTA-21 is higher.

In other words, even when a performance control pattern corresponding to any one of the normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, super reach β variation pattern, and super reach γ variation pattern is selected, any of productions A to C in the variable display performance is selected. The probability of winning the jackpot is higher when any of effects D to E is executed than when either is executed. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of productions A to E is highest in the order of production A, production B, production C, production D, production E (jackpot reliability; production A < production B < production C < production D < production E). , in the reach mode, when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the active line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the proportion of jackpots is higher when effects A to C are executed. In the case where the performances D to E are executed when the "Tenpai symbol -3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher. Therefore, performances D to E as second performances have higher jackpot reliability than performances A to C as first performances, so performances A to C as first performances are "weak performances", and Performances D to E are "strong performances."

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 controls performances A to C (weak performance) as the first performance when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode. Any one of the three types can be executed, and when the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode, production D is performed as the second production. It is possible to execute one of two types: ~E (strong effect). In this way, when performances A to C are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is lower than when performances D to E are executed, but in the reach mode, the decorative symbol display area 5C is "medium". Decorative symbol display area where the number of production patterns (3 types of productions A to C) of the first production that can be executed when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the reach mode is "medium" When the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes on the active line in 5C, the number of performance patterns of the second performance that can be executed (two types of performances D and E) is larger than the number of performance patterns (two types of performances D and E). It is possible to make the player interested in seeing how the effects A to C are executed in this manner, thereby increasing the interest.

In this way, when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, when the number of symbols passing on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C reaches the first number (for example, 2), the effect A Effects D to E are executed when the number of symbols that have passed on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C reaches the second number (for example, 4), rather than when the effects D to C are executed. However, if effects A to C are executed at the timing when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the active line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. However, it is possible to hit the jackpot via Super Reach, and the number of possible performance patterns is larger than when performances D to E are executed at the timing when the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes. It is possible to improve the interest when the performance develops at the timing when the "tenpai symbol -5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C.

In addition, the percentage of jackpots is higher when the variable display effect based on the super reach α variation pattern is executed than when the variable display effect based on the normal reach variation pattern is executed, and the variable display effect based on the super reach α variation pattern is higher. The percentage of jackpots is higher when the variable display effect based on the super reach β variation pattern is executed than when the display effect is executed, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the variable display effect based on the super reach β variation pattern is executed. Also, the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher when a variable display effect based on the super reach γ variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the variable display performance in which the pseudo continuous performance is executed, the number of performance patterns that can be executed as the first performance in the reach performance after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous performance (performances B, C/Figure 9-9 ) is smaller than the number of performance patterns that can be executed as the first performance in the reach performance before executing the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous performance (effects A to C/see Figure 9-8), and the number of performance patterns that can be executed again in the pseudo continuous performance is When performance B or performance C is executed in the reach performance after executing the variable display, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is the ratio of performances A to C in the reach performance before executing the variable display again in the pseudo-continuous performance. is higher than the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, that is, the rate at which the jackpot is achieved is higher when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, so a re-variable display is executed for the player. Since it is possible to create interest in whether the effects A to C are executed before or after, the interest is increased.

In this way, in the reach performance after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous performance, it is possible to execute any of performances B, C, and D except for performance A, which has the lowest jackpot reliability among performances A to C. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot, and therefore it is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052SG, since the order of performance A, performance B, performance C, performance D, and performance E is high (jackpot reliability; performance A < performance B < performance C < performance D < performance E), as the second performance. The performance D or the performance E has higher jackpot reliability than any of the performances A to C as the first performance. The average value of the jackpot reliability in the plurality of first performances that can be executed when the "symbol -5 symbol" passes is "Tenpai symbol -3" on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode. If the jackpot reliability is higher than the average value of the jackpot reliability of the plurality of second performances that can be executed when the "symbol" passes, one of the plurality of first performances is one of the plurality of second performances. The jackpot reliability may be higher than that.

In addition, the average value of the jackpot reliability of multiple weak performances that can be performed in the reach performance after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance is the same as the average value of the jackpot reliability of the multiple weak performances that can be performed in the reach-to-reach performance before executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance. If it is higher than the average value of the jackpot reliability of the plurality of first effects, then any one of the plurality of first effects that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect. The jackpot reliability may be lower than the jackpot reliability of any one of the plurality of first performances that can be executed in the ready-to-win performance before executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, in the variable display effects based on the effect control patterns PTA-10 to PTA-12, 14 to 19, after executing any of effects D to E, the performance control CPU 120 controls the "medium" decorative pattern display area in the ready-to-reach mode. By making the variable display mode of 5C a high-speed variable display mode and making it difficult to visually recognize the symbols, it becomes difficult to identify the number of symbols that have passed on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, so productions A to C This can make it difficult to understand that the process was not executed.

In addition, in the ready-to-reach mode, when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, that is, at the first timing of executing the first performance, a pseudo continuous performance is executed. The "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passed on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in reach mode than the percentage of jackpot in the variable display performance based on the performance control pattern PTA-14 to 16. In other words, at any timing, the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher in the variable display effects based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19, which execute the pseudo continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect. It is possible to draw attention to whether the pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-6 (F), the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the tenpai symbol in the reach mode is an odd number than when it is an even number, and the tenpai symbol in the reach mode is "7". The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the symbol is a "7" than when the symbol is any other symbol. Specifically, when the tenpai symbol in the reach mode is an even number, effects A to C are often executed, and when the tenpai symbol in the reach mode is an odd number or "7", effects D to E are executed. will be executed more often. In this way, a variable display performance is executed based on the performance control pattern in which performances A to C, which are the first performances, are executed depending on whether the tenpai symbol in the reach mode is an even number, an odd number, or "7". Because the rate at which the variable display effects are performed based on the effect control pattern in which the effects D to E, which are the second effects, are executed is different, attention should be paid to the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach effect. I can do it.

In addition, in production control pattern PTA-1 and production control pattern PTA-7, the Tenpai symbol passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C without executing productions A to E in the reach mode. Afterwards, the Tenpai symbol may be stopped and displayed on the active line, resulting in a jackpot, so even if effects A to E are not executed in the ready-to-reach mode, a jackpot can be expected. In other words, in the ready-to-reach mode, the more symbols that pass on the active line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the more you can expect the second effects D to E to be executed, while the "tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes. If the second effects D to E are not executed at the time, the losing symbols are often stopped and displayed, but the jackpot symbols may also be stopped and displayed, so it is possible to maintain the expectation for the jackpot. can.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the variable display based on the production control patterns PTA-20 and 21, after the reach mode is reached in the third re-variable display, in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, When the "Tenpai symbol -3 symbol" passes, the performance develops into a super reach performance without executing the performance E, so that the player can expect a more highly anticipated performance to be executed.

In addition, there are performance control patterns PTA-2 to 4, 8 to 10, 14, 15, 17, and 18 that execute performances A to C as the first performance, and performance control patterns PTA-2 that execute performances D to E as the second performance. -5, 6, 11, 12, 16, 19 to 21 are effect control patterns that are different from the effect control patterns PTA-1 and 13, which continue the low-speed variable display in the ready-to-reach mode until the symbol is stopped and displayed. , In the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, transition to a separate production at a predetermined timing during the reach production period from when the "Tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" passes the active line until the "Tenpai symbol" passes. (branch) and end the variable display.

Specifically, the production control patterns PTA-1, 13 and the other production control patterns PTA-2 to 12, 14 to 21 are the "tenpai symbol-5 symbol" in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Alternatively, a common variable display performance is performed during the first period until the "tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passes the active line, but the performance mode is different in the subsequent second period. Therefore, since it is possible to set a plurality of types of variable display performance patterns with different performance contents for a single variable pattern with a common variable display time, it is possible to diversify the performance.

(9th invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of identification information, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122194 As described in ), it is possible to perform a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed variably while two symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed. There were cases where the type of performance at the development destination was different when the first medium symbol passed and when the +5th medium symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the number of the middle symbol and the production type of the development destination, so that the number of the middle symbol that passes on the valid symbol combination line causes the production of the development destination. Since the type is easy to predict, there is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the interest. Therefore, with the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention is:
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is generated. ) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
From the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, all identification information except one of the combinations of identification information that constitutes the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a part that allows the performance control CPU 120 to set the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to a ready-to-reach mode) capable of executing a ready-to-reach effect that variably displays one piece of identification information,
The performance execution means performs a first performance (for example, when the number of identification information that is switched and displayed as a variable display of the one identification information in the reach performance becomes a first number (for example, 2)). When performing productions A to C), the number of identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the identification information in the reach production is a second number (for example, 4 pieces) that is larger than the first number. ), the second effect (for example, effects D and E) may be executed.
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first performance is executed is lower than the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second performance is executed,
The number of types of first performances that can be executed by the performance execution means is greater than the number of types of second performances that can be executed by the performance execution means (for example, when performances A to C are executed as the first performances, Compared to the case where performances D to E are executed as the second performance, the rate of control to the jackpot game state is lower, but in the ready-to-reach mode, the "Tenpai symbol - 5" on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is The number of production patterns (3 types of productions A to C) of the first production that can be executed when the "symbol of" passes is the "Tenpai symbol - This is larger than the number of performance patterns (two types of performances D and E) of the second performance that can be executed when the "3 symbol" passes.See Figure 9-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first performance is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is lower than when the second performance is executed, but the number of types of the first performance is equal to the number of types of the second performance. By having a relatively large number of players, it is possible to make the player interested in which type of first effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The performance execution means can make it difficult to visually recognize the first identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach performance in the second performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform a performance control pattern PTA- In the variable display effects based on 10 to 12 and 14 to 19, after executing any of effects D to E, the variable display mode of the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is set as the high-speed variable display mode in the ready-to-reach mode. (parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times one piece of identification information has been switched and displayed.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect execution means executes a re-variable display in which the variable display of the identification information is performed again a predetermined number of times after the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. The specific performance can be executed at a first timing for executing the first performance and a second timing for performing the second performance,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the first timing is lower than the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the second timing (for example, Performance control that executes a pseudo continuous performance when the "tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode, that is, at the first timing of executing the first performance. When the "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the active line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode than the percentage of jackpots in the variable display effects based on patterns PTA-14 to 16, In other words, the percentage of jackpots is higher in the variable display effects based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19, which execute the pseudo continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-reach effect, the rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ (for example, if the ten-pai symbol in the ready-to-reach mode is an even number, Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which effects A to C, which are the first effects, are executed, and effect D, which is the second effect. - The part where the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which E is executed is different)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the performance execution means executes the first performance and the second performance after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach performance. It is possible to stop displaying a combination of multiple pieces of identification information constituting a specific display result without displaying a specific display result (for example, in production control pattern PTA-1 and production control pattern PTA-7, productions A to E in the reach mode are (The part where the Tenpai symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line after the Tenpai symbol passes over the active line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C without executing the above, resulting in a jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide surprise to the player.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the ninth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Performance setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of performance settings including a first performance setting and a second performance setting different from the first performance setting (for example, a performance control CPU 120, when the gaming state is in the normal state) (for example, a part that sets the first production mode when the low-accuracy low base state) and sets the second production mode in the time-saving state where the time-saving control is executed,
The performance executing means is capable of executing the ready-to-reach performance regardless of which of the first performance setting and the second performance setting is set by the performance setting means,
If the second effect setting is set, the second effect is executed, while if the second effect setting is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode, , as the performance control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the part where the performance control pattern that can execute the performances A to C that was executable in the first performance mode cannot be selected)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution probability of the first performance can be varied depending on the performance settings, the interest is improved.

(10th invention)
As explained above, this embodiment includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of identification information, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122194 As described in ), it is possible to perform a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed variably while two symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed. There were cases where the type of performance at the development destination was different when the first medium symbol passed and when the +5th medium symbol of the left and right symbols passed on the symbol combination effective line. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the number of the middle symbol and the production type of the development destination, so that the number of the middle symbol that passes on the valid symbol combination line causes the production of the development destination. Since the type is easy to predict, there is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the interest. Therefore, with the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention is:
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is generated. ) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
From the start of the variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, all identification information except one of the combinations of identification information that constitutes the specific variable display result is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a part that allows the performance control CPU 120 to set the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to a ready-to-reach mode) capable of executing a ready-to-reach effect that variably displays one piece of identification information,
The performance execution means is
In the reach performance, when the number of pieces of identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the one identification information reaches a first number (for example, 2 pieces), a first effect (for example, effects A to C) is performed. and when the number of identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the identification information in the reach effect becomes a second number (for example, 4) that is larger than the first number. There are cases where a second performance (for example, performances D and E) is executed,
It is possible to execute a specific effect in which the variable display of the identification information is performed again after the variable display of the identification information is started and the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is executed again for a predetermined number of times. Yes (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pseudo continuous performance),
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed in the reach effect after executing the re-variable display is greater than the number of types of the first effects that can be executed in the reach effect before executing the re-variable display. less,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first effect is executed in the ready-to-win effect after executing the re-variable display is the same as the rate at which the first effect is controlled in the advantageous state in the ready-to-win effect before executing the re-variable display. is higher than the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled when the The number of performance patterns that can be executed as a performance (performances B and C/see Figure 9-9) is the number of performance patterns that can be executed as the first performance in the reach performance before executing the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous performance (performance A ~C/see Figure 9-8), and when performance B or performance C is executed in the reach performance after executing the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is (Higher than the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled when performances A to C are executed in the reach performance before executing the re-variable display in a continuous performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first effect is executed after the re-variable display is executed, the number of types of executable first effects is small, but the first effect is executed before the re-variable display is executed. By having a higher rate of being controlled in an advantageous state than when the first effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the first effect is executed before or after the re-variable display is executed. This increases interest.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The performance execution means executes the re-variable display a specific number of times out of the predetermined times in the specific performance, and when the number of pieces of identification information switched and displayed in the ready-to-reach performance becomes the second number. However, there are cases where the second effect is not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 9-9, in the variable display based on the effect control pattern PTA-20, 21, the third re-variable display becomes the reach mode. After that, even when the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the part that develops into a super reach performance without executing the performance E)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the re-variable display is executed a specific number of times, the second effect may not be executed even when the identification information of the second number is switched and displayed in the reach effect, which increases the expectation level. It is possible to make people expect that a high level of performance will be carried out.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The performance execution means is capable of making it difficult to visually recognize the first identification information that is switched and displayed in the reach performance in the second performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance control pattern PTA- In the variable display performances based on 10 to 12 and 14 to 19, after executing any of the performances D to E, the variable display mode of the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode is set as the high-speed variable display mode of the symbol. (parts that can be difficult to see)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many times one piece of identification information has been switched and displayed.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance at a first timing for performing the first performance and a second timing for performing the second performance,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the first timing is lower than the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific performance is executed at the second timing (for example, Performance control that executes a pseudo continuous performance when the "Tenpai symbol - 5 symbol" passes over the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode, that is, at the first timing of executing the first performance. When the "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, than the rate of hitting the jackpot with the variable display effects based on patterns PTA-14 to 16. In other words, the percentage of jackpots is higher in the variable display effects based on the effect control patterns PTA-17 to 19, which execute the pseudo continuous effect at the second timing of executing the second effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to the means 5 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
Depending on the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-reach effect, the rate at which the first effect is executed and the rate at which the second effect is executed differ (for example, if the ten-pai symbol in the ready-to-reach mode is an even number, Depending on whether it is an odd number or "7", the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which effects A to C, which are the first effects, are executed, and effect D, which is the second effect. - The part where the rate at which variable display effects are executed based on the effect control pattern in which E is executed is different)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the type of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach effect.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed, the performance execution means executes the first performance and the second performance after switching and displaying the one identification information in the reach performance. It is possible to stop displaying a combination of multiple pieces of identification information that make up a specific display result without having to display the specific display results. (The part where the Tenpai symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line after the Tenpai symbol passes over the active line in the "Medium" decorative symbol display area 5C without executing, resulting in a jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide surprise to the player.

The gaming machine according to the means 7 of the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6,
Performance setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of performance settings including a first performance setting and a second performance setting different from the first performance setting (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to set the gaming state to the normal state) (for example, a part that sets the first production mode when the low base state is low, and sets the second production mode in the time saving state where the time saving control is executed),
The performance execution means is capable of executing the ready-to-reach performance regardless of which of the first performance setting and the second performance setting is set by the performance setting means,
If the second effect setting is set, the second effect is executed, while if the second effect setting is set, the first effect is not executed (for example, in the second effect mode, , as the performance control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, the part where the performance control pattern that can execute the performances A to C that was executable in the first performance mode is not selectable)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution probability of the first performance can be varied depending on the performance settings, the interest is improved.

(Modified example of characteristic part 052SG)
Next, a modification of the characteristic portion 052SG will be described based on FIGS. 9-11. As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), the performance control CPU 120 sets the first performance mode when the gaming state is the normal state (for example, low probability low base state), and the time saving control is executed. The second performance mode is set in the time saving state. The first production mode and the second production mode are different in, for example, the production mode such as the background image when executing the variable display production, the execution rate and mode of various preview productions, etc. In this modification, As shown in FIG. 9-11(B), in the second performance mode, performances A to C that were executable in the first performance mode can be performed as performance control patterns corresponding to each variation pattern. Performance control patterns PTB corresponding to control patterns PTA-2 to PTA-4, 8 to 10, 14, 15, 17, and 18 are not selectable.

In other words, in a time-saving state where time-saving control is executed, there is a high probability that a variation pattern with a short variable display time will be selected, and since probability-variable control may be executed, when the variable display result is wrong, Frequent occurrence of performances A to C with low jackpot reliability is suppressed. In this way, since the execution probabilities of performances A to C can be made different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the performance can be suitably executed according to the set performance mode (gaming state). I can do it.

In addition, in this modified example, a form is exemplified in which the effect control pattern is determined so as not to execute effects A to C when the second effect mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to determine a production control pattern that executes productions A to C at a rate different (for example, lower) than when the first production mode is set.

Note that the performance mode is not limited to the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and three or more types of performance modes may be settable. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 enables execution of performance mode setting processing in the performance control process processing (S171), and in the performance mode setting process, special performances (for example, demo performance, jackpot performance, small win performance, super reach performance, etc.) ) is not being executed (for example, including a state where a game is not being executed or a variable display of symbols), " A presentation mode change screen (not shown) may be displayed so that the player can set the presentation mode to either the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, effects A to C can be executed when the "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode. Although the form in which effects D to E can be executed when the ``Tenpai symbol-3 symbol'' passes over the effective line in the ``medium'' decorative symbol display area 5C was exemplified in , the present invention is limited to this example. In the reach mode, on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, "Tenpai symbol-6 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-4 symbol", "Tenpai symbol-2 symbol", "Tenpai symbol" The first performance or the second performance may be executed at the timing when the symbol "-1 symbol" or the like passes.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the first performance can be executed at the first timing when the "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode, and the first effect can be executed in the reach mode. In the embodiment, a mode in which the second performance can be performed at the second timing when the "Tenpai symbol-3 symbol" passes over the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the reach mode, the first performance can be executed at multiple timings during the reach period in which decorative symbols are switched and displayed on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, or the first performance can be performed at multiple timings. It may be possible to perform two effects.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in the ready-to-reach mode, the first performance and the second performance can be executed at the timing when the "tenpai symbol - n symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first performance and the second performance may be executed at the timing when the "tenpai symbol - n symbol" approaches the active line. In other words, it may be at any timing during the period until the predetermined decorative pattern is switched to a different decorative pattern, or it may be at a timing when the predetermined decorative pattern is being displayed.

Also, for example, the timing at which the "n symbol" is switched and displayed to the "n+1 symbol" is, for example, in the above embodiment 5, after the "n symbol" passes on the active line, the "n+1 symbol" '' may be at any timing when a portion of the line is on the effective line, or may be at a timing when the line reaches a position where it can be stopped and displayed. Also, if the display is switched due to a change in form, the timing may be when the "n+1 symbol" becomes easier to see than the "n symbol", or the "n+1 symbol" stops. It may be the timing at which the displayable mode has changed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the ready-to-reach mode, the performance is performed at multiple timings from the "tenpai symbol-6 symbol" until the "tenpai symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Although a form in which any of A to E can be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. After passing from "Symbol of Tenpai symbol" to "Symbol of Tenpai symbol", "Design of Tenpai symbol + 1 symbol", "Design of Tenpai symbol + 2 symbol", etc. are passed, and in the variable display of symbols in the second round, third round, etc. Any one of performances A to E may be executed as the first performance or the second performance at a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a mode in which any of performances A to E can be executed as the first performance or second performance in the reach mode of the normal reach performance was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the first performance and the second performance may be executable in the reach mode of the super reach performance. In addition, it may be possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance in the reach mode of the super reach performance. In addition, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times and the fourth re-variable display is executed, the jackpot symbol combination will be variable in all decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R without executing the reach effect. A full rotation effect for display may be executed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the first production (productions A to C) is executed at the timing when the "Tenpai symbol-5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode. The reliability of the jackpot is increased by the second performance (performances D to E) executed at the timing when the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes on the active line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the reach mode. Although different forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the first performance or second performance develops is after the "tenpai symbol - 6 symbol" passes the active line. If there are multiple timings in the reach period until the "symbol" passes, the reliability of the jackpot is at least different between the first performance that can be executed at the first timing of the multiple timings and the second performance that can be executed at the second timing. For example, the first performance that can be executed at the third timing and the first performance that can be executed at the fourth timing may have the same jackpot reliability.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, effects A to C are executed as the first effect when the "tenpai symbol -5 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode. For example, effects D to E have been illustrated as second effects executed at the timing when the "Tenpai symbol - 3 symbol" passes on the effective line in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C in the ready-to-reach mode. The invention is not limited to this, and performances other than performances A to C may be executed as the first performance, and performances other than performances D to E may be executed as the second performance. In other words, the types of performances that can be executed as the first performance and the second performance may be increased. Furthermore, a pseudo-continuous performance may be included as the first performance or the second performance.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, performances B and C that can be executed as the first performances in the ready-to-win mode after executing the pseudo-continuous production are the performances A to C that can be executed as the first performances in the ready-to-reach mode before executing the pseudo-continuous production. Although a form that is a part of C is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. By performing a different type of performance (for example, a performance in which a character different from characters C1 to C3 appears) from the first performances that are executable in the ready-to-reach mode, a pseudo continuous performance is executed. It may also be possible to suggest to the player that the player has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot if he or she does so.

In addition, when performing performances B and C in the ready-to-reach mode after executing the pseudo-continuous performance, the performance mode is different from the performance mode when performing performances B and C in the ready-to-reach mode before executing the pseudo-continuous performance. It may also be executed in . Specifically, when executing the effect B in the reach mode after executing the pseudo continuous effect, by changing the behavior, clothes, hair color, etc. of the appearing character C1, the appearance after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Even in the ready-to-win mode, it may be possible to perform a performance (increasing chances) that suggests to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when performance B is executed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the performance control pattern that executes performances A to C as the first performance and the performance control pattern that executes performances D to E as the second performance are such that the low-speed variable display stops in the reach mode. Although we have exemplified a production control pattern that is different from the production control patterns PTA-1 and PTA-13 that continue until the variable display is displayed, that is, a form in which the production mode of the variable display production from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may or may not execute the first performance or the second performance in one performance control pattern, such as a preview performance, for example. You may also make it so that there is.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as a reach effect, when n or more identical decorative symbols (“n” is 2 or more) are stopped and displayed on one active line, resulting in a jackpot combination, one Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. If n or more identical decorative symbols ("n" is 2 or more) are stopped and displayed together on at least one of the active lines of , a jackpot combination is created, and the winning combination is The present invention is also applicable to devices that can simultaneously perform reach modes (so-called double line reach, irregular line reach, etc.). In addition, when multiple active lines are in reach mode at the same time, the decorative pattern area where the variable display continues may be a separate decorative pattern area for each active line, or a common decorative pattern area for at least two of the multiple active lines. It may also be a decorative pattern area. Furthermore, in the reach effect, one active line may increase to a plurality of active lines, or a plurality of active lines may decrease to one active line.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effects A to E are executed at the same determination rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from 1 to 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects A to E may be executed at different determination ratios depending on the set value.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. Note that in these enclosed game machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings and general game machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, a state that is advantageous for the player is a state in which a big bonus or regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small prize, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state) This includes a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, an ART (assisted replay time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined performance of the present invention is enabled in a slot machine, special roles such as a big bonus or a regular bonus are internally won, but the combinations of symbols are not aligned and are carried over. Suggestions that suggest the possibility that a combination of symbols will be derived and displayed and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), and the AT state and It is possible to execute multiple games (multiple variable displays) between winning the ART state and starting the AT state or ART state.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Image display device 103 ROM
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result,
From the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, the decoration identification information excluding one of the combinations of the plurality of decoration identification information is stopped and displayed. Equipped with a production execution means capable of executing a reach production that displays identification information in a variable manner,
The performance execution means is
After executing a predetermined effect after the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a specific effect of variable displaying again can be executed at a first timing and a second timing,
In the case where the first performance is executed when the number of pieces of the one decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the one decoration identification information in the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance becomes the first number; When the number of the decoration identification information switched and displayed as a variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a second number that is larger than the first number, the first performance is not executed and a second performance different from the first performance is executed. There are cases where two performances are performed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first performance is executed is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second performance is executed,
The number of types of the first effects that can be executed by the effect execution means is greater than the number of types of second effects that can be executed by the effect execution means,
The rate at which the first performance is performed and the rate at which the second performance is performed differ depending on the type of decoration identification information that is stopped and displayed in the reach performance,
The first timing and the second timing are timings after starting the reach effect,
Even after the reach effect has started and the specific effect has been executed, the reach effect can be executed,
The ready-to-reach effect is switched as a variable display of the first decoration identification information depending on when the ready-to-reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect and when the ready-to-reach effect is executed after executing the specific effect. The ratio at which the number of pieces of decoration identification information to be displayed is the first number and the ratio at which the number is the second number are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images